Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS …Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) ... Reason for revision ... Create UPSR

.

Alcatel-Lucent 1850Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) | Release 2.0.User Provisioning Guide

8DG08136EAAAISSUE 3

JULY 2009

..

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners..

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.

Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that this information product was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.

This manual applies to ALCATL-LUCENT 1850 TSS-320/160 software. Release notes describing revisions to this software may impact operations described in this manual.

This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance with the U.S.Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerece or other appropriate U.S. goverment agency(s).

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrievel system, or transmitted or distributed by any means, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the written permission of Alcatel-Lucent. Preparing derivative works or providing instruction based on the material is prohibited unless agreed to in writing by Alcatel-Lucent.

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of Alcatel-Lucent. Such obligations will only be committed to in a written sales agreement signed by Alcatel-Lucent.

Trademarks

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Conformance statements

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communcations. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be correct the interference at the expense of the user.

Security Statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make the connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorised access.

Limited warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.

Documentation

Product documentation is available on Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software web site at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/osds.

To offer comments on this documentation, visit Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software web site at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/osds and select Online Services Helpdesk.

Developed by Alcatel-Lucent.

i i i8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Contents

About this document

Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................... 3

General information ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Reason for revision ....................................................................................................................................... 3

Intended audience ......................................................................................................................................... 3

Supported systems ........................................................................................................................................ 3

How to use this document ............................................................................................................................ 4

Safety information ........................................................................................................................................ 5

Related information ...................................................................................................................................... 6

Document support ........................................................................................................................................ 7

Technical support .......................................................................................................................................... 7

How to order ................................................................................................................................................. 7

How to comment .......................................................................................................................................... 7

Packaging collection and recovery requirements ......................................................................................... 7

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ..................................................................................................... 8

1 Craft terminal overview

2 Graphical user interface basics

Keyboard ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

Mouse ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-4

Browser’s page .......................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Hyperlinks ............................................................................................................................................... 2-11

Combo-boxes ........................................................................................................................................... 2-13

Menus ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-14

Entry boxes .............................................................................................................................................. 2-18

Dialog boxes ............................................................................................................................................ 2-20

Symbols and icons ................................................................................................................................... 2-23

3 Menu bar

System access ............................................................................................................................................ 3-3

Equipment menu ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16

Connection menu ..................................................................................................................................... 3-18

Data menu ................................................................................................................................................ 3-24

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Contents

i v 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-41

Alarms menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-55

Protection menu ...................................................................................................................................... 3-60

Synchronization menu ............................................................................................................................. 3-66

System management menu ...................................................................................................................... 3-74

Security menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-97

Tools menu ............................................................................................................................................ 3-112

Help menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-117

4 Tree area

Scope ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

Access the aggregation management resources ........................................................................................ 4-5

LAG configuration .................................................................................................................................... 4-8

Access the rack resources ........................................................................................................................ 4-18

Access the shelf resources ....................................................................................................................... 4-20

Access the unit ........................................................................................................................................ 4-26

Access a module ...................................................................................................................................... 4-31

Access a resource .................................................................................................................................... 4-35

5 Procedures

Log into System ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4

Logout of the system ................................................................................................................................. 5-7

Change user password ............................................................................................................................... 5-9

Change site identifier .............................................................................................................................. 5-11

Display alarms ......................................................................................................................................... 5-12

Provision equipment ................................................................................................................................ 5-14

Configure a 1P10GSO module ................................................................................................................ 5-15

Control Plane - Configure OSPF and DDRP .......................................................................................... 5-21

Control Plane - Routing: Create Control Channel Interface ................................................................... 5-32

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Network Call ..................................................................................... 5-37

Control Plane - Signalling: Create Network Connection ........................................................................ 5-41

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Traffic Descriptor .............................................................................. 5-45

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Hoplist ............................................................................................... 5-47

Control Plane - Transmission: Create TE-Link ....................................................................................... 5-49

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Bundle link .................................................................................. 5-51

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Abstract link ................................................................................ 5-53

Create LAG ............................................................................................................................................. 5-56

Create Traffic Descriptor- Data ............................................................................................................... 5-60

Contents

v8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create VLAN ...........................................................................................................................................5-64

Create color profile ..................................................................................................................................5-66

Create ASAP list ......................................................................................................................................5-68

Create DCC Channel ...............................................................................................................................5-70

Create XC Overhead ................................................................................................................................5-75

Create ASAP ............................................................................................................................................5-77

Create IGMP ............................................................................................................................................5-79

Create IP tunnel .......................................................................................................................................5-82

Create IP route .........................................................................................................................................5-84

Create Gateway Map Table ......................................................................................................................5-86

Create TCA profile ..................................................................................................................................5-88

Create APS ...............................................................................................................................................5-91

Create UPSR ............................................................................................................................................5-93

Create BLSR ............................................................................................................................................5-94

Provision STS Cross Connection .............................................................................................................5-96

Provision Conference .............................................................................................................................5-105

Change the date and time of the Network Element ...............................................................................5-107

6 Abbreviations

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Contents

v i 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

v i i8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of figures

1-1 Example of network management architecture ............................................................................ 1-4

1-2 Example of management of SONET and DATA network ........................................................... 1-4

1-3 Management, downloading, and upgrading ................................................................................. 1-5

2-1 Example of a browser’s page layout ............................................................................................ 2-6

2-2 ZIC panel (example) .................................................................................................................... 2-7

2-3 Window menu options ................................................................................................................. 2-8

2-4 Scroll bar components .................................................................................................................. 2-9

2-5 ZIC functional tabs (example) ................................................................................................... 2-10

2-6 Example of Combo-box ............................................................................................................. 2-13

2-7 Example of Combo-box (contd.) ................................................................................................ 2-13

2-8 Combo-box (contd.) ................................................................................................................... 2-13

2-9 Pull-down menu ......................................................................................................................... 2-15

2-10 Page view with cascading menu ................................................................................................ 2-16

2-11 Highlighted menu item indicating selection .............................................................................. 2-17

2-12 Dialog box with entry boxes ...................................................................................................... 2-18

2-13 Tree ............................................................................................................................................. 2-21

2-14 Question dialog box ................................................................................................................... 2-21

2-15 Node composition (example) ..................................................................................................... 2-25

2-16 Rack - Graphical composition (example) .................................................................................. 2-26

2-17 Rack - Table composition (example) ......................................................................................... 2-26

2-18 Switch shelf graphic representation (example) .......................................................................... 2-27

3-1 Browser start-up (example) .......................................................................................................... 3-3

3-2 Blank browser (example) ............................................................................................................. 3-4

3-3 Authentication dialog box ............................................................................................................ 3-5

3-4 Details of the authentication dialog box ....................................................................................... 3-6

3-5 ZIC browser loading .................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-6 ZIC browser start (example) ........................................................................................................ 3-7

3-7 Create shelf configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-16

3-8 Connection - TDM .................................................................................................................... 3-18

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of figures

v i i i 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-9 Connection - Data - Create XC - P2P ........................................................................................ 3-19

3-10 Connection - Data - Create XC - PB .......................................................................................... 3-20

3-11 Connection page - PB wizard - Warning message ..................................................................... 3-22

3-12 Search/Delete XC ....................................................................................................................... 3-22

3-13 Traffic descriptor - Data ............................................................................................................. 3-24

3-14 Data page - Traffic descriptor details ......................................................................................... 3-25

3-15 VLAN profile with ghost objects ............................................................................................... 3-26

3-16 Color profile ............................................................................................................................... 3-28

3-17 ASAP list ................................................................................................................................... 3-29

3-18 Data page - ASAP no alarm list ................................................................................................. 3-30

3-19 Data page - ASAP primary alarms List ..................................................................................... 3-30

3-20 Data page - ASAP path alarm list .............................................................................................. 3-31

3-21 Data page - ASAP all alarm list ................................................................................................. 3-31

3-22 Data - Search .............................................................................................................................. 3-32

3-23 Data page - Search - Preferences ............................................................................................... 3-33

3-24 Switch -> DB filtering -> Dynamic F-DB ................................................................................. 3-34

3-25 Switch -> DB filtering -> Static UF-DB .................................................................................... 3-34

3-26 Switch -> DB filtering -> Static MF-DB ................................................................................... 3-35

3-27 Switch -> DB filtering -> Dynamic MF-DB ............................................................................. 3-35

3-28 Switch -> IGMP FGM Reg. ....................................................................................................... 3-36

3-29 Bridge page - configuration ....................................................................................................... 3-37

3-30 Bridge page -> Virtual LAN ...................................................................................................... 3-38

3-31 Data -> IGMP Mng .................................................................................................................... 3-39

3-32 Group Segregation management page ....................................................................................... 3-40

3-33 NE discovery - Site Header 1 ..................................................................................................... 3-41

3-34 NE discovery - Site header 2 ..................................................................................................... 3-42

3-35 DCC channel - Network IF ........................................................................................................ 3-43

3-36 DCC page - OSI ULC report ..................................................................................................... 3-44

3-37 XC Overhead ............................................................................................................................. 3-44

3-38 DCN Physical Interface page - IP address ................................................................................. 3-45

3-39 DCN physical interface page - LAN management .................................................................... 3-46

3-40 DCN physical interface page - ARPCACHE management ....................................................... 3-47

3-41 IP tunnel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-47

List of figures

i x8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-42 Network domain page - IP Route ............................................................................................... 3-48

3-43 Network Domain page - Gateway Map Table ............................................................................ 3-49

3-44 Network domain page - NSAP Report ....................................................................................... 3-50

3-45 OSI NE area ............................................................................................................................... 3-51

3-46 TARP Management page - TARP Report .................................................................................. 3-52

3-47 TARP Management page - TARP Cache ................................................................................... 3-53

3-48 TARP Management page - TARP LDB ..................................................................................... 3-54

3-49 Alarms page - TCA profile ....................................................................................................... 3-55

3-50 Alarms page - ASAPs management .......................................................................................... 3-56

3-51 Alarm cutoff ............................................................................................................................... 3-58

3-52 Alarm resynchronization ............................................................................................................ 3-59

3-53 EQPS tab .................................................................................................................................... 3-60

3-54 EQPS selection page .................................................................................................................. 3-62

3-55 Protection Page -> APS .............................................................................................................. 3-63

3-56 Protection Page -> UPSR ........................................................................................................... 3-64

3-57 Protection Page -> BLSR ........................................................................................................... 3-65

3-58 Modify BITS-0 or BITS-1 panel ................................................................................................ 3-66

3-59 Alarm view for synchronization ................................................................................................. 3-67

3-60 Modify BITS outgoing panel ..................................................................................................... 3-68

3-61 Synchronization Page - Modify Synch. ..................................................................................... 3-70

3-62 Synchronization - Modify Out Synch. ....................................................................................... 3-72

3-63 Synchronization Page- Modify Switch Synch. .......................................................................... 3-73

3-64 System management - Initialize system - with new release ....................................................... 3-75

3-65 System Management - Initialize system with old release .......................................................... 3-75

3-66 System management - In-service upgrade status ....................................................................... 3-76

3-67 System Management - In-Service Upgrade - Start In-Service Upgrade .................................... 3-78

3-68 System management - In-service upgrade - Stop In-Service Upgrade ...................................... 3-78

3-69 System management - In-service upgrade - Remove In-Service upgrade ................................. 3-79

3-70 System Management Page - Perform DB backup ...................................................................... 3-81

3-71 System management - perform DB backup ............................................................................... 3-82

3-72 System management - restore DB ............................................................................................. 3-83

3-73 System management - DB information ..................................................................................... 3-84

3-74 System management - primary backup DB information .......................................................... 3-85

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of figures

x 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-75 System management - Secondary backup DB information ..................................................... 3-85

3-76 System management - copy remote file ..................................................................................... 3-87

3-77 System management - cancel copy ............................................................................................ 3-90

3-78 System management - Remote file information ........................................................................ 3-91

3-79 System management - retrieve file information ......................................................................... 3-92

3-80 System management - System Configuration ............................................................................ 3-93

3-81 System management - set site identifier .................................................................................... 3-94

3-82 System management - network time protocol configuration ..................................................... 3-95

3-83 Change password ...................................................................................................................... 3-98

3-84 Figure 5 - User information page ............................................................................................... 3-99

3-85 Security - create user account page ......................................................................................... 3-101

3-86 Security - Use Information page ............................................................................................. 3-103

3-87 Security - Account default settings ......................................................................................... 3-104

3-88 Security Page - current sessions ............................................................................................... 3-105

3-89 Security - Command access privileges page ............................................................................ 3-106

3-90 Security - modify command privileges page ........................................................................... 3-107

3-91 Security - Audit Log page ........................................................................................................ 3-108

3-92 Security - retrieve audit page with results ................................................................................ 3-109

3-93 Security - retrieve audit page without results .......................................................................... 3-109

3-94 Security - Log attributes ............................................................................................................3-110

3-95 Security - Logout page ..............................................................................................................3-111

3-96 Tools - TL1 console ..................................................................................................................3-112

3-97 Tools - Accessing TL1 console .................................................................................................3-113

3-98 Tools - Telnet console ...............................................................................................................3-113

3-99 Tools - TL1 command ...............................................................................................................3-114

3-100 Tools - TL1 command answer ..................................................................................................3-115

3-101 Tools - TL1 command syntax ...................................................................................................3-115

3-102 NE TL1 parameters ...................................................................................................................3-116

3-103 Help - about ...............................................................................................................................3-117

3-104 Help Page - NE TL1 Syntax .....................................................................................................3-118

4-1 ZIC browser page ......................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-2 Tree area ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-3 Tree area expanded ...................................................................................................................... 4-3

List of figures

x i8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 Aggregation management tree ..................................................................................................... 4-5

4-5 AM tree ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4-6 LAG configuration ....................................................................................................................... 4-9

4-7 IN-flows configuration ............................................................................................................... 4-12

4-8 IN-FLOWS resource details ....................................................................................................... 4-13

4-9 IN-FLOWS XConnection details ............................................................................................... 4-15

4-10 OUT-FLOWS configuration ...................................................................................................... 4-16

4-11 Rack tree ..................................................................................................................................... 4-18

4-12 Rack page ................................................................................................................................... 4-18

4-13 Rack layout page ........................................................................................................................ 4-19

4-14 Shelf tree .................................................................................................................................... 4-20

4-15 Shelf page (e.g. SWITCH shelf) ................................................................................................ 4-21

4-16 Shelf layout page ........................................................................................................................ 4-24

4-17 Shelf detail message .................................................................................................................. 4-25

4-18 Shelf provisioning message ........................................................................................................ 4-25

4-19 Access a unit (e.g. 10XANY) .................................................................................................... 4-27

4-20 Accessing a module (e.g. 10XANY) .......................................................................................... 4-32

4-21 SFP module ................................................................................................................................ 4-32

4-22 Access a resource (e.g. 10XANY) ............................................................................................. 4-35

4-23 PM Report .................................................................................................................................. 4-39

4-24 PM Init Register ......................................................................................................................... 4-42

4-25 PM Mode .................................................................................................................................... 4-43

4-26 The PROTECTION tab .............................................................................................................. 4-45

4-27 STS tab ....................................................................................................................................... 4-46

4-28 List STS tab ................................................................................................................................ 4-47

4-29 Provisioning of STSn ................................................................................................................. 4-48

4-30 Accessing a resource (e.g. PP20G ETS port) ............................................................................. 4-49

4-31 BRIDGE functional tab .............................................................................................................. 4-54

4-32 Configure IGMP ......................................................................................................................... 4-55

4-33 IGMP Properties ......................................................................................................................... 4-56

4-34 Accessing a resource - 1 (e.g. 11GBAR port) ............................................................................ 4-58

4-35 Accessing a module - 1 (e.g. XFP) ............................................................................................ 4-65

4-36 Alarm view window (e.g. XFP module) .................................................................................... 4-67

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of figures

x i i 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-37 Modify and OTPORT tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ........................................................ 4-68

4-38 PM tab and PM Report for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ............................................................ 4-71

4-39 PM Init Register tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ................................................................ 4-73

4-40 PM Mode tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ........................................................................... 4-74

4-41 PM Baseline tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ....................................................................... 4-75

4-42 Select Line and OTU2 Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ............................................... 4-76

4-43 ODU2 Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ........................................................................ 4-80

4-44 ODU2 PM Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP) ................................................................. 4-82

5-1 Login Window ............................................................................................................................. 5-5

5-2 Loading ZIC application window ................................................................................................ 5-6

5-3 ZIC Application Window ............................................................................................................. 5-7

5-4 Logout Panel ................................................................................................................................ 5-8

5-5 Modify Password Panel ............................................................................................................... 5-9

5-6 Set Site Identifier ........................................................................................................................5-11

5-7 Alarms ........................................................................................................................................ 5-12

5-8 Alarms- Filter By Panel ............................................................................................................. 5-13

5-9 Rack xx -> Shelf xx -> Board xx ............................................................................................... 5-15

5-10 Rack xx -> Shelf xx -> Board xx ............................................................................................... 5-16

5-11 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Module xx ............................................................................ 5-17

5-12 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Module xx ............................................................................ 5-18

5-13 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Port xx .................................................................................. 5-19

5-14 Control Plane ............................................................................................................................. 5-21

5-15 OSPF AREA .............................................................................................................................. 5-23

5-16 OSPF DB ................................................................................................................................... 5-24

5-17 OSPF NEIGHBOR .................................................................................................................... 5-25

5-18 DDRP AREA ............................................................................................................................. 5-27

5-19 DDRP DB .................................................................................................................................. 5-29

5-20 DDRP NEIGHBOR ................................................................................................................... 5-30

5-21 Control Channel Interface creation page ................................................................................... 5-32

5-22 IP-IP Port Creation Page ............................................................................................................ 5-33

5-23 GRE Port Creation Page ............................................................................................................ 5-34

5-24 TE-Link Port Creation Page ....................................................................................................... 5-35

5-25 LAN Port Creation Page ............................................................................................................ 5-35

List of figures

x i i i8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-26 VAID Port Creation Page ........................................................................................................... 5-36

5-27 Call Creation Page ...................................................................................................................... 5-37

5-28 Network Creation Page .............................................................................................................. 5-42

5-29 SIGNALLING - Traffic Desc functional tab ............................................................................. 5-45

5-30 Hoplist Creation Page ................................................................................................................ 5-47

5-31 CP TE-Link Provisioning page .................................................................................................. 5-49

5-32 Bundle link - Create page ........................................................................................................... 5-51

5-33 Abstract link - Create page ......................................................................................................... 5-53

5-34 Aggregation management tree ................................................................................................... 5-57

5-35 Link aggregation management ................................................................................................... 5-57

5-36 Traffic Desc Page ....................................................................................................................... 5-60

5-37 VLAN profile ............................................................................................................................. 5-64

5-38 VLAN protocol profile ............................................................................................................... 5-64

5-39 Color profile creation ................................................................................................................. 5-66

5-40 ASAP window ............................................................................................................................ 5-68

5-41 New ASAP ................................................................................................................................. 5-68

5-42 ASAP contd. ............................................................................................................................... 5-69

5-43 DCC channel .............................................................................................................................. 5-70

5-44 DCC Mode - TERMINATED .................................................................................................... 5-71

5-45 DCC Mode - CROSSCONNECTED ......................................................................................... 5-71

5-46 DCC channel - filter by .............................................................................................................. 5-72

5-47 DCC channel - filter by (contd.) ................................................................................................ 5-72

5-48 Create new network interface ..................................................................................................... 5-73

5-49 Overhead channel cross-connection ........................................................................................... 5-75

5-50 Overhead channel cross-connection - enter channel .................................................................. 5-75

5-51 DCC_SELECTION window ...................................................................................................... 5-76

5-52 ASAP Creation ........................................................................................................................... 5-77

5-53 IGMP Creation ........................................................................................................................... 5-79

5-54 Network Element IP TUNNEL CREATION window ............................................................... 5-82

5-55 IP routing creation Page ............................................................................................................. 5-84

5-56 IP routing selection .................................................................................................................... 5-85

5-57 ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY Page ..................................................................... 5-86

5-58 TCA profile ................................................................................................................................ 5-88

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of figures

x i v 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-59 TCA profile creation .................................................................................................................. 5-90

5-60 APS creation .............................................................................................................................. 5-91

5-61 UPSR Creation ........................................................................................................................... 5-93

5-62 BLSR Creation ........................................................................................................................... 5-94

5-63 Provision Board (10GSO-1-1-4) ................................................................................................ 5-96

5-64 Provision Module (XFP-1-1-4-1: XI-641) ................................................................................. 5-97

5-65 Provision Port OC192-1-1-4-1f ................................................................................................. 5-98

5-66 Specify an STS Panel ................................................................................................................. 5-99

5-67 Modify STS Page ..................................................................................................................... 5-100

5-68 Xconnection Panel ................................................................................................................... 5-101

5-69 Provision Cross Connection Panel ........................................................................................... 5-102

5-70 Connection Type - Conference ................................................................................................ 5-105

5-71 Provision Conference ............................................................................................................... 5-105

5-72 NTP Config .............................................................................................................................. 5-107

18DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of tables

1-1 Alcatel-Lucent1850 TSS interfaces ............................................................................................. 1-5

1-2 Basic requirement ......................................................................................................................... 1-7

2-1 Examples of hyperlinks .............................................................................................................. 2-11

3-1 Application menu bar ................................................................................................................... 3-8

3-2 Traffic Descriptor, Policing Mode and Color Profile for INFLOW resource: ........................... 3-27

3-3 Prioritization for OUTFLOW resource with “Stacked-VLAN management ............................. 3-28

3-4 Valid AID / input parameters combinations ............................................................................... 3-87

5-1 Board x parameters .................................................................................................................... 5-15

5-2 Control Plane Global Parameter Panel ....................................................................................... 5-21

5-3 OSPF AREA Panel .................................................................................................................... 5-23

5-4 OSPF NEIGHBOR tab Parameters ............................................................................................ 5-26

5-5 DDRP AREA Panel ................................................................................................................... 5-28

5-6 DDRP NEIGHBOR tab .............................................................................................................. 5-30

5-7 Link aggregation parameters ...................................................................................................... 5-57

5-8 Traffic descriptor parameters ..................................................................................................... 5-61

5-9 VLAN protocol profile parameters ............................................................................................ 5-64

5-10 Color profile parameters ............................................................................................................ 5-66

5-11 DCC channel - NE interface details parameters ........................................................................ 5-71

5-12 DCC channel - new NE interface parameters ............................................................................ 5-73

5-13 Enter channel parameters ........................................................................................................... 5-75

5-14 ASAP CREATE Parameters ....................................................................................................... 5-78

5-15 IGMP Configuration Panel Parameters ...................................................................................... 5-79

5-16 Network Element IP Tunnel configuration parameters .............................................................. 5-82

5-17 IP routing parameters ................................................................................................................. 5-84

5-18 ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY Parameters ........................................................... 5-86

5-19 Filter panel parameters ............................................................................................................... 5-89

5-20 TCP profile parameters .............................................................................................................. 5-90

5-21 APS Configuration Panel Parameters ........................................................................................ 5-91

5-22 BLSR Panel Parameters ............................................................................................................. 5-94

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List of tables

2 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-23 Provision Cross Connection Panel Parameters ........................................................................ 5-102

38DG08136EAAAIssue 3 June 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About this document

Purpose

This document describes high level information on how to access the system and the respective screens that can be chosen. It also describes the user provisioning and administration.

General information

This manual applies to the following:

Reason for revision

The following table shows the revision history of this document:

Intended audience

This information product is intended for individuals who are responsible for using ZIC (Zero Installation Craft Terminal) to provision and maintain the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) product.

Supported systems

This document applies to the following product release:

Release 2.0

Delivery Date June 30th, 2009

ZIC Pack Release 2.08.38

ZIC Application Release 2.08.38

TL1 Plug-in _3.0.16_CGI

EDITION DATE DESCRIPTION

01 June 2009 It is the first validated and officially released issue of this document.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About this document

4 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 June 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 1. Product release document applicability

Documents relevant to software applications (typically the Operator's Guides) are not modified unless the new software “version” distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.

Moreover, should the screen prints included in the guide contain the product–release's "version" marking, they are not replaced in the guides related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.

How to use this document

This document is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:

PRODUCT PART NUMBER

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION PART NUMBER

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320

2.0 8DG 08501 AAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-160

2.0 8DG 08791 AAAA

Topic Description

PREFACE It contains general information such as preliminary information, safety recommendations, scope, history, and related documents. Furthermore, it describes the document structure.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Zero Installation Craft Terminal is introduced and the characteristics described. The main functionalities are listed and briefly described.

GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PRINCIPLES

The Elements of the user interface that you will most frequently deal with are examined in detail.

MENU This document aims at introducing the ZIC working environment, to the users of the system, in terms of getting access to the system, the environment utilities, the existing functionalities and menu navigation through the system.

TREE This document aims at introducing the ZIC working environment, to the users of the system, in terms of getting access to the system, the environment utilities, the existing functionalities and tree navigation through the system.

About this document

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 June 2009

5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

Safety precautions

Recommended safety rules are indicated in this manual.

Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instruction in this document should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail.If local regulations are not mandatory, than safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.

THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.

Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

For additional safety precautions, please see the Safety Guide.

PROCEDURES The aim of this document is to describe the operations related to the management of the Network Element and symbols within the ZIC. The actions leading to the creation, Issue, deletion, storage and listing of Network Element shall be indicated. The navigation through the necessary sequences of the Network Element needed to create the TN will be described.Sufficient details on the addition, the removal and the selection of Network Element symbols are given to enable an easy characterization of the network.

ABBREVIATIONS The abbreviation list is supplied.

Topic Description

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About this document


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety personnel

Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other person as well as prevent damaging the equipment.

Access to the equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.

Service personnel skill

Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in particular on the equipment subject of this handbook. An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. Merely reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in “Related information” (p. 6) is considered as not enough.

Related information

The complete list of documents related to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) are available in the table below:1. 8DG08136EAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release

2.0 User Provisioning Guide. Provides general Craft Terminal information, screens description and user provisioning procedures by means of the ZIC.

2. 8DG08136FAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 TL1 Commands Guide. Provides comprehensive resource to all Translator Language 1 commands available on the 1850 TSS-320.

3. 8DG08136DAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide. Provides information on Maintenance and Troubleclearing procedures.

4. 8DG08136HAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Safety Guide. Provides information and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury and to prevent material damage to the equipment.

5. 8DG08136BAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Installation Guide. Provides information on Equipment Installation.

6. 8DG08136_AAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Engineering Rules. Provides the design constraints for engineering a WDM line system.

7. 8DG08136GAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 CLI User Provisioning Guide. Provides a comprehensive resource for all the Command Line Interface commands and user provisioning procedures by means of the CLI.

About this document

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 June 2009

7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8. 8DG08136AAAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160)Release 2.0 Product Information. Provides information on Equipment description, composition, features of the equipment, detailed unit description, characteristics, hardware settings, and documents common units used in the different configurations of the product.

9. 8DG08136CAAA— Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Turn-Up & Commissioning Guide. Provides information on Turn-Up, Tests and Operation procedures.

10. 8DG08136_AAA— Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Engineering and Planning Tool Operation Guide. Provides information on Turn-Up, Tests and Operation procedures.

11. 8DG08136_AAA — Alcatel-Lucent Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) Release 2.0 Documentation CD-ROM. It contains the electronic format of all the above listed documents.

Document support

Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a non-technical number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630) 713 5000 (for all countries).

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact information.

For all the Technical Support needs (engineering, installation, maintenance etc.) and product training, please contact your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use the Online Customer Support Site (OLCS) web site (https://support.lucent.com).

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline ([email protected]).

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.

https://support.lucent.com

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

https://support.lucent.com

http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

About this document


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end of their useful life in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment.

For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at [email protected].

1-18DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Craft terminal overview

Overview

With the extensive introduction of SONET, DATA and WDM in the transport network, centralized and integrated network management is mandatory for Network Operators to realize the potential cost saving and required Quality of service.

Alcatel-Lucent provides a comprehensive range of Network Management Applications compliant with the ITU-T Telecommunication management Network Principles.

The ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal) is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements from different Alcatel-Lucent SONET, DATA and WDM products, providing ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element.

The ZIC can be integrated to products in charge of the management of networks and network elements.

The ZIC uses a state-of-the-art platform for providing an advanced and integrated Management.

The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) control sub-system is based on a two level model:• Equipment Controller (EC) implemented by the EC320 card.• Shelf Controller (SC) implemented as part of the MATRIX card.

The EC provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and Management system.

EC performs all the SW functions related to the control and management activities like info-model processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base management, SW downloading and management, etc.

To support these activities, the EC function requires a non-volatile mass storage device (flash card).

The SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the control and management operation of the boards.

SC is 1+1 protected, as it is involved in critical activities (for instance EPS).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewCraft terminal overview

1-2 8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Internal bus

For the controller sub–system the following buses are defined:• “Management bus” that allows:

– connection between SC and boards for configuration data provisioning– remote inventory data acquisition– data collection (alarms) and commands handling (example: loops)

• “ISSB bus” used for communication among the Equipment Controller, the Shelf Controllers and the Local Microprocessor.

External interfaces F interface - It is available from the EC function for connection to a local Craft Terminal; the electrical interface and connector (both RJ45 and mUSB) are provided by the EC320 card.

M interface - It is dedicated to an OS station connection. The M interface can be supported for the connection to a WAN or LAN respectively.

The M requires a 10BASE2 or a 10BASET interface.

M-remote interface - It is a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Communication Channels. Through the M-remote interface the system can exchange management messages with a remote OS. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160 up to three full duplex ECC channels can be terminated from each SONET interface: one DCCM at 576 kbit/s, one DCCR at 192 kbit/s and one DCCP 64 kbit/s.

RE / HK interface - this interface consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms and for housekeeping signals. The relevant electrical interfaces are placed on the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160 interconnections panel and are controlled by the EC function through parallel I/O ports.

RA interface - it is dedicated to send commands towards the rack to light up the relevant lamps located on GENTRU unit. Examples of network management architecture are reported in “Example of network management architecture” (p. 1-4). and Figure 1-2. In these figures any generic SONET and DATA equipment (Add / Drop Multiplexer, Cross-connect, Regenerator, etc.) inserted in the network is indicated by the acronym NE (Network Element).

Network management interfaces

The SONET Equipment provides two types of physical interfaces for management functions: the F interface and the Q3 interface. These interfaces can be connected to the manager computer, that are:• A Personal Computer connected through the F interface for local management.• OPERATION SYSTEM (OS). Workstations utilized for the TMN

(Telecommunications Management Network). They are connected through the M interface, for network management.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8DG08136EAAAIssue 3 July 2009

1-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Operator’s Guides deal with the management achieved by means of the first type of computer, via the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal). For the Telecommunications Management Network description refer to the handbooks of the various Operation Systems.

The management can be realized in local or remote mode:• in the local mode the managed equipment are directly connected to the computer via F

interface • in the remote mode (Type 1) the managed pieces of equipment are indirectly

connected via the IP Networking which can include both DCCM / DCCR protocol or Ethernet LAN (Local Area Network)

• in the remote mode (Type2) the managed pieces of equipment are indirectly connected via an IP network.

• in the remote mode (Type3) the managed pieces of equipment are indirectly connected via external modem.

The software provided needs a WINDOWS XP computer operating environment.

The operator interface is organized in a Browser system. A skill on these tools is required on behalf of the user.

The management main functions permit the following:• Alarm (fault) management, for real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault

localization and correction• System management, example:

– Configuration management, for handling operational data of the Network Element.– Performance Monitoring management, to set up, collect, log and display

performance data associated with the managed NE according to ITU-T G.826.• NE access according to the user profile

The management functions are operative for all the NEs, local or remote.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 1-1 Example of network management architecture

Figure 1-2 Example of management of SONET and DATA network



1-5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 1-3 Management, downloading, and upgrading

The management function is performed using one of three interfaces: CT, TL1, or CLI. Supported signals and interfaces are listed in “Alcatel-Lucent1850 TSS interfaces” (p. 1-5)

Table 1-1 Alcatel-Lucent1850 TSS interfaces

Manage Signals

ZIC (Zero Installation Craft terminal)

TL1 (Transaction Language Level 1)

CLI (Command Line Interface)

SONET X X

DATA X X

WDM X

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The TL1 (Translation Language level 1) consists of the following input commands: – TID – AID – CTAG– General Delayed Activation– Positional– Keyword Parameter Block– State Parameter Blocks– Command output response (successful and unsuccessful) messages– Acknowledgement output messages– Autonomous output messages.

TL1 uses a Telnet session with TCP/IP connectivity between the host from which the Telnet session is opened, and the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS.

The CLI (Command Line Interface) performs most of the CT functionalities.

CLI is not required to manage the following functions:• Support domain

– Event Reporting– PM Filtering



1-7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– MIB Backup/Restore and SW download• C&R domain

– Tunnel management

Additionally, CLI does not cover the following management functions:• Support Domain:

– Condition of Configuration Mode– Inhibit/Allow Logging

Personal computer characteristics

Personal computer interface

The PC permits to transfer information between the Operator and the Network Element (NE). For this purpose it uses the following interfaces:• Operator (human interface) - Microsoft Windows system with windows, scrolling-

down menu, and mouse functions. The operator can traverse the tree-structured environment selecting the applications and functions allowed.

• NE (equipment interface) - ZIC requires TCP/IP connection on available interface (F interface, M interface, DCC interface).

Computer hardware configuration

The computer configuration to be used consists of:

Table 1-2 Basic requirement

Options:• Ethernet port - As an alternative to the CD-ROM drive for software download and

upgrading (if any). In alternative to the serial bootstrap, the Ethernet port can be used for LAN based bootstrap.

• One 3" 1/2 floppy disk drive (1.44MB) - To facilitate external files exchanges.• A printer (serial or parallel known by WINDOWS)

CPU Pentium IV 1.7 GHz (2.8 Ghz suggested)

RAM 1 Gb, (2Gb for HP Server and PA-RISC Hard-disk)

HARD DISK free space 40 Gb

Swap area ≥ 400 Mb

MONITOR 15" (20" suggested)

RESOLUTION 1024 x 768 pixel

CD-ROM drive

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Computer software configuration

The following software items are required as an alternative:• Internet Explorer 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0 and Internet Explorer 8.0 using

'Compatibility View' mode.• Mozilla Firefox 2.0 and Mozilla Firefox 3.0.

Browser limitation: Dynamic page generation and ZIC graphical structure do not allow using 'Back', 'Forward' and 'Refresh' browser buttons or related menu items.

ZIC main functionalities

This chapter describes the main functionalities of the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal). The functionalities constitute the heading of each sub-section below.

System management

• Start-Up/Stop of the system• Visualization of all the ZIC related processes• The computing environment (system back-up/restore)

Security management

This section is related to security within the ZIC. The functions of configuration and installation are accessible only to the Administrator. It contains:• Access to the system (password modification, login, logout)• Profile assignment (determines which functionalities the user has access to)• Property of the map (public / private)

Network element management

This section deals with the management of the equipment present in the network. Network Element management is detailed in the Operator's Guides dedicated to the NE.

Some of the functionalities offered by the ZIC are common to all the NEs, other functionalities are dedicated and are present only for some NE types.• Supervision of NEs• Changing of boards and subracks• Configuration of protection schemes• Alarm and Event Notification• Configuration of the alarm severity profile• Time management• Cross Connection management• Port management• LAC (Local Access Control) and Manager List



1-9

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Performance monitoring. It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network.

• Synchronization• Software download for NE upgradation, following the network evolution.

Software management

The software management section refers to the software package(s) present in the NE. This is the support of the ZIC application running on any NE. The operations concerned are: • Getting information about the software downloaded in a selected NE• Getting information about the software present on the FTP server for the NE• Downloading software packages from the FTP server to a NE

Alarm management

Alarm management function is used to detect and correct abnormal functioning of the system. The managed entities transmit alarms to the ZIC that processes them. The different alarm functionalities are:• Reception and processing of alarms• Establishment of filter criteria on alarm reception• Log management of alarms• Internal storing and treatment of alarm information• User interface service management for displaying purposes• User interface operations for alarm processing• Alarm probable cause• The alarms concerning a particular managed entity is represented in a synthetic way in

all the pages concerning the entity

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Graphical user interface basics

Contents

This section describes the following topics:

Keyboard 2-3

Mouse 2-4

Browser’s page 2-5

Hyperlinks 2-11

Combo-boxes 2-13

Menus 2-14

Entry boxes 2-18

Dialog boxes 2-20

Symbols and icons 2-22

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Purpose

The Zero Installation Craft (ZIC) terminal user interface is based on a browser client program that uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) to make requests of Web servers throughout the Internet on behalf of the user.

The following browsers can be used to access the interface are:• Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE)• Mozilla Firefox (the open source version of Netscape)

This section provides the different elements composing the interface as well as the users general environment. Details on the various elements will be obtained using the Help of the browser and the relevant manual.

The users work environment can be partitioned into the following utilities and widgets:• Keyboards - The different keys and the actions they induce are defined.• Mouse - The functioning of the mouse buttons is provided.• Desktop - A desktop is the screen area where you bring the applications needed for

your work, arrange them to suit your preferences, and put them away when you're done. Desktop provides a way to make a single display seem like several displays. You can customize the desktop by adding shortcuts to your favorite programs, document, etc. and by changing its look as you like.

• Browser’s pages - The page’s or panel’s general layout, menu and configuration (size) is described.

• Buttons - The different types of buttons are described.• Combo-boxes - The different types of buttons are described.• Menus - The menu types used to open pages, select icons and navigate through the

different functionalities of the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal) are introduced.• Entry and dialogue boxes - The different types of boxes and their aspect is defined so

that the user is familiar with them.• Symbol and icon - A small, graphic representation of an object on the workspace.

Objects can be "iconified" (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace and "normalized" (returned to their original appearance) as needed. Processes executing in an object continue to execute when the object is iconified.

The above utilities and widgets are detailed in the following sub-chapters.

KeyboardGraphical user interface basics


2-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Keyboard

The different keys

A workstation keyboard displays the following types of keys:• Alphabetic Keys - Represents the letters of the alphabet, the punctuation marks, and

text-formatting functions such as Tab, Return, and the Space bar.• Numeric Keys - Represents the numbers from 0 to 9. They are located near the top of

the keyboard and in a numeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard.• Navigation Keys - Used to move the insertion cursor (up, down, right, left). These

keys are commonly called arrow keys and are represented on the keyboard by the symbols. This category comprises the keys like Home, Page Up, Page Down, and End also.

• Modifier Keys - used in conjunction with other keys to modify the meaning of these keys. They are Ctrl, Shift, or Alt keys.

• Special purpose Keys - they have particular functions and are labelled to specify their function. They are, for example, the Help, Esc, Enter, Delete, BackSpace, and Insert keys.

Location and insertion cursor

This cursor takes the form of an I-beam pointer. It indicates where the text is going to be entered. This cursor is frequently met when using Entry boxes (see next paragraphs). The cursor can be moved horizontally and vertically using the Navigation keys.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MouseGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mouse

Description

The mouse is associated with a mouse pointer. This pointer represents the current position of the mouse on the screen. Any movement of the mouse, on the mouse pad, moves the pointer on the screen in an identical way. The mouse can be moved anywhere on the workspace.

Mouse buttons

There are two Mouse buttons. The actions undertaken using the different mouse buttons depend on their configuration.

Details on mouse configuration can be obtained in the “Mouse property" of “Control panel". • Select/deselect - enables you to select/deselect objects.• Custom Select - enables you to generate pop-up menus.• Drag and drop - enables the user to move files from one location to the other by

holding the left mouse button.

In a right-handed mouse configuration the “Select / deselect" button is left side. With left handed mouse configuration it is on the opposite side.

Mouse functionalities

• Double click - number of actions can be undertaken by double clicking using the “select" mouse button. For example, closing Browser’s Pages, opening Browser’s Pages related to objects. – Place the mouse pointer over the object you wish to open.– Click twice, rapidly, using the "Select" mouse button on the object.– The mouse pointer can take the work in progress representation until the object

should open. – Place the mouse pointer over the "Window menu button" of the window (see

Figure 2-1).– Click twice, rapidly, using the "Select" mouse button.

The action should be immediate and the window is closed.

Browser’s pageGraphical user interface basics


2-5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Browser’s page

Purpose

This section defines the attributes of Browser’s Pages and describes their general aspects.

Dimensions and layout

The Browser’s Page (also called Tabbed browsing or tabbed document interface [TDI]), is a feature to effectively contain multiple pages in a single page. Each item occupies the browser's entire viewing area when displayed. Tabs facilitate navigation among the items. The term "tab" arises from the visual similarity to the physical tabs on manila folders used to store and organize hard copy.

This technology overview focuses on three areas: • Makes everyday tasks easier with improved navigation through tabbed browsing.• Dynamic security protection through a robust new architecture, security features that

help defend against malicious software (also known as malware).• Improved platform for Web manageability, including improved support for cascading

style sheets (CSS).

The advantage of tabbed browsing is the fact that it eliminates the need to display tiled pages that demand frequent resizing and repositioning. Tabbed browsing consumes less memory and operating system resources than tiled-window browsing provided the user does not keep too many items open at once. Figure 2-1 displays the standard Browser’s Page layout.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 Example of a browser’s page layout

Client area and browser’s page titles

The Browser’s Page title gives the name of the Page.

The Client area is the area in which you work, i.e. select from combo-box and act on hyperlink. Tabs over Client Area are used to select the current content of the Client Area.

The Equipment tab is fixed and is used to display an equipment graphical view of selected tree item (at rack and shelf levels only). The third tab-title changes according to the selected tree item (of tree area) or menu item (of menu bar).

The following items in the Tabs area are present only for a common look-and-feel purpose and do not have any active functionality: • Left and right arrows at left of tabs.• Folded-sheet icon near each tab title.

The Alarm table is fixed and it is used to display current Network Element alarms.

According to the choices, the Client area displays panel(s), table(s), and hyperlinks.• Panel - is a rectangular light gray area that contains the combo-boxes (see details in

“Combo-boxes”), text fields and entry boxes.



2-7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-2 ZIC panel (example)

Window menu

The windows menu enables the operations to be undertaken on the window.

To open the window menu, click on the window menu button. You can then select an item from the pull-down menu that appears. The window menu options are shown in Figure 2-3.

It differs according to the Browser interface. In the following is for Internet Explorer (IE) from Microsoft.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-3 Window menu options

The window menu options are:• Restore - Restores the window from the iconified state to its normal size (in this case

the window is already opened so this menu option is greyed. Greyed menu options are explained in paragraph “Menus”).

• Move - Displaces the window around the workspace.• Size - Changes the size of the window.• Minimize - Iconifies the window.• Maximize - Gives the window the full screen size.• Close - The window is closed and disappears from the workspace.

Scroll Bars

If the page size does not enable all the information contained in the tree and client area to be visible, scroll bars enable you to move up, down, right, or left in the tree and client area. There are vertical and horizontal scroll bars as shown in Figure 2-4.



2-9

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-4 Scroll bar components

There are four ways to use scroll bars:• Stepper arrows - Place the mouse pointer on the stepper arrow and click on it using

the "Select" mouse button. The contents in the client area are displaced only one unit in the direction indicated by the stepper arrow.

• Scroll regions - Place the mouse pointer in the scroll region outside the sliders. Click, using the "Select" mouse button. The contents in the client area are displaced one Page length.

• Sliders - Place the mouse pointer on the slider. Drag, using the "Select" mouse button, the slider in the direction desired. The contents in the client area are displaced as long as the slider moves.

Functional tabs

Functional tab is a rectangular light blue tab that identifies the available function by the labels for selection purposes. It is usually placed above the panel.

Stepper row up

Slider

Scrolling Region

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-5 ZIC functional tabs (example)

HyperlinksGraphical user interface basics


2-11

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hyperlinks

Description

In any working application related to the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal), the operator will have to confirm, cancel, select options or ask for help using hyperlinks. Different types of hyperlinks exist and are described in this section.

The hyperlinks are identified by the word identifying the action associated with it. Some examples of the different types of hyperlinks are described in Table 2-1

Table 2-1 Examples of hyperlinks

Save To save the settings

Save & continue To save and continue the settings

Save & exit To save and exit the settings

Provision To start the provision procedure

Deprovision To start the deprovision procedure

Cancel To cancel the settings

Delete To cancel the settings

Exit To exit the settings

Remove To remove the provisioning from the settings

Remote Inventory To perform the data recovering of the involved entity

Retrieve Section Trace To recover the data of the section trace

Retrieve To recover the data of the involved entity

Create xxxTo start the creation procedure of the xxx entity (e.g. APS, ethernet etc.)

Select To open a further page in order to operate a selection

Modify To modify the settings without exiting the page

Apply To apply the involved entity

New To start the creation procedure of the entity

Search To start the search procedure about the involved entity

ContinueTo continue the operation with further options without saving the actual settings

Default To set the relevant item at the factory default value

View To display the hidden values (usually for alarms)

Reset Criteria To cancel the search criteria previously set

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HyperlinksGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

To apply the action related to a hyperlink, position the mouse pointer over the word you wish to select and click using the "Select" mouse button.

The hyperlinks may open dialogue boxes. The reader may note that often, identical hyperlinks are found on different Pages or pages. This is because they often require similar actions to be undertaken.

Bitmask detailTo display the bitmask of the selected entity (e.g., for Layer 2 control frames)

Operate xxx To apply the setting for the xxx entity (e.g., Loopback etc.)

Combo-boxesGraphical user interface basics


2-13

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Combo-boxes

Description

When you click on a combo-box, you open an option menu from which you choose a single item. Combo-boxes are used when a list of items are mutually exclusive.

Figure 2-6 Example of Combo-box

Note: The example given above enables you to choose the Provisioned type. To open the option menu, click on the option button. Select an item from the list of options.

Figure 2-7 Example of Combo-box (contd.)

For some fields a blank description is present. This allows to select none of the available items.

Figure 2-8 Combo-box (contd.)

Combo-box

Option button

Menu

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MenusGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Menus

Description

This section describes an important aspect of the user interface. The user constantly has to open Pages, select icons and navigate through the different functionalities of the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal).

A menu consists of a title, that usually identifies the nature of the actions that can be undertaken, and a list of options associated with actions.

Menu types can be classified as:• Menu bars• Pull-down menus• Cascading menus• Pop-up menus

Menu bars

Menu bars present at the top of a page’s browser (under the title of the page) and above the client area. They appear automatically along with the page. Example is given in the Figure 2-1. They contain the titles from which pull-down menus and cascading menus are opened.

Pull down menu

A pull-down menu is pulled down from a menu item present in a menu bar. To open a pull-down menu, click on the title of the menu you need to open with the "Select" mouse button.



2-15

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-9 Pull-down menu

Note: A menu option followed by "..." means that selecting this option opens another view. For example the Open... or Save As... menu options in the File pull- down menu.

Cascading menus

Cascading menus are derived from pull-down menus and represent additional options for the pull-down menu item selected. Cascading menus are indicated if the ">" sign follows an option in a pull-down menu.

To open a cascading menu, click on the menu option with the ">" sign in the pull-down menu.

Pull down menu selected

Menu Options

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-10 Page view with cascading menu

In the figure above, the Control Plane -> CP TDM menu option is selected.

Pop-up menus

Pop-up menus appear when you click the Custom mouse button, in the following cases:• Click on a symbol in a view - In this case, after selecting the symbol, click on it using

the Custom mouse button. The pop-up menu opens, select an item from the menu by clicking on it using the Select or Custom mouse buttons.

• Click on the page menu button - In this case, place the mouse pointer over the page menu button and keep the "Custom" button pressed. Drag the mouse pointer to the menu option you require, the menu option is highlighted. Release the mouse button after selecting the correct menu option.

Unavailable menu items and menu item selection

In an opened menu (pull-down or cascading), the unavailable option cannot be displayed. All the items can be accessed.

To select an item from a menu (any type of menu) place the mouse pointer over the item and click using the Select mouse button. The item appears highlighted.



2-17

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-11 Highlighted menu item indicating selection

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Entry boxesGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Entry boxes

Description and definition

Entry fields are the placeholders to insert and modify data. See Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12 Dialog box with entry boxes

Each Entry Box has two parts:• Entry Box Label - Indicates what is entered or what is to be entered in the entry area

concerned.• Entry Box - When selected, enables you to enter a text.

Note: The text entry areas may not be accessible for entering text. In this case they have a different color than other entry areas in which text can be entered. In the example above, the Granularity entry box may not be used for text entry. Its color is lighter than the other entry areas. Furthermore the text cursor is dotted, indicating that text cannot be entered.

To access an entry box and enter text, click on the text entry area. The text cursor begins to blink. The text cursor has an I-beam shape. The following keys are useful when entering text.

To access another entry box, you can either click in the entry box using the Select mouse button or use the Tab key on the keyboard.

Key FunctionBack Space Deletes to the left.Del Deletes to the right., , , Displace the cursor along the text.

Entry boxesGraphical user interface basics


2-19

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the Tab key that enables you to pass to an entry box situated beneath the one from which the Tab key is pressed. Select Shift+Tab keys to access an entry box situated above the one from which the action is launched.

Note: The Tab key does not give you access to those entry boxes that are read only. Therefore, when a dialogue box containing entry boxes opens, the Tab key takes you directly to the first entry box in which you can write.

Syntactic guidelines

This provides the use of upper case and lower case characters when entering text. The ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal) software distinguishes between the two so care must be taken when entering text. The text entered is re-displayed in its original form.

This means that if upper case characters are given to a Log file name, the name appears in upper case characters in the save directory.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dialog boxesGraphical user interface basics


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Dialog boxes

Generalities

Dialogue boxes provide an interface between the ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft terminal) and the user. They enable to confirm operations or consult information, displayed by the system, following an action of the user.

There are many types of dialogue boxes. They generally combine several of the graphical controls previously described (scroll bars, push buttons...). The principal dialogue boxes are described below.

Tree

A tree area is generally a part of a page that enables the operator to consult and select items from an existing list.



2-21

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-13 Tree

Message and confirmation dialog boxes

These dialog boxes display messages and information. They require a confirmation of the action to undertake. Generally, work is suspended till the dialogue box is closed. This means that you first have to click on the corresponding button (OK, Cancel, Help, or other options) before resuming operations.

Figure 2-14 Question dialog box

A question dialogue box requests additional confirmation following a command previously launched. The Cancel push button cancels the operation.

Tree Area

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The information dialog box gives indication on the action the operator has undertaken.

Symbols and iconsGraphical user interface basics


2-23

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Symbols and icons

Description

The tree presents some icons in order to resume the associated functions.

Symbol/Icon Description

Node This icon is usually provided with a ball icon which identifies the status (red, yellow or green) and the node ID name. The browser “Equipment” tab also allows to show the composition (see Figure 2-15.)

CTRL PLANE: CP Icons for GMPLS management.

LAG (Link Aggregation Group)Icon for logical data resources. Greyed icon means not provided.

Rack This icon represents the rack that is identified by a number (e.g., “-1”). It can houses one or more shelf (more than one rack is possible). The browser “Equipment” tab also allows to show the composition (see Figure 2-17).

ShelfThis icon represents the shelf; it is identified by the rack number the relevant shelf number and the type of configuration (e.g. “SHELF-1-1-SWTCH”, “SHELF-1-1”). The browser “Equipment” tab allows to show also the composition (see Figure 2-18, Figure 2-18)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Unit/card/pack Each unit/card/pack is identified by a label that identifies the type of unit/card/pack (e.g., “EC320”) and a number associated to the rack and shelf (e.g., “-1-1-1”).If a slot is free the label is “MDL-1-1-3” (MoDuLe-rack-1, shelf-1, position-3). The color identifies the relevant status• green provisioned and in-service.• red and grey provisioned and out-of-service• grey not provisioned.

Module.Usually associated to the SFP/XFP, a symbol which identifies the carried signal. Greyed icon means not provisioned

Ethernet interface.The symbol identifies the ETS (blue colour) and ETB (orange color) physical interface (e.g., DATA-1-1-8-2-1). Greyed icon means not provisioned

Symbol/Icon Description



2-25

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-15 Node composition (example)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-16 Rack - Graphical composition (example)

Figure 2-17 Rack - Table composition (example)



2-27

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-18 Switch shelf graphic representation (example)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Menu bar

Contents

This section contains the following topics:

System access 3-3

Equipment menu 3-16

Connection menu 3-18

Data menu 3-24

Xcom menu 3-41

Alarms menu 3-54

Protection menu 3-58

Synchronization menu 3-64

System management menu 3-72

Security menu 3-95

Tools menu 3-109

Help menu 3-114

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to introduce the Zero-Installation Craft (ZIC) terminal utilities and navigation ways through the system by using the Menu bar.

System accessMenu bar


3-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System access

Start-up of the craft terminal application

After Login to the WINDOWS XP operating system, the desktop is presented to the operator.

In order to activate the ZIC software product the operator has to perform the following sequence:

a. Click on the browser icon (e.g., Internet Explorer) on the lower left corner of the desktop as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Browser start-up (example)

b. The browser opens its main page as shown in Figure 3-2.

Browser Icon (Internet Explorer)

Browser Icon (Mozilla Firefox)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-2 Blank browser (example)

c. Enter the IP address of the shelf in the Address field (in the example 151.98.235.232) and press the “Enter” key and the “Authentication dialog box” as shown in Figure 3-3.



3-5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-3 Authentication dialog box

The Authentication dialog box contains the following fields:• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID. According to the specification. It is a

sequence from 5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters, where the first character must always be an alphabetic character. The following special characters are also accepted as valid characters and will be part of the User Identifier: % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (under score).

• Password - Specifies the user's login password. According to the specification, it is a sequence from 8 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters. The Password must contain at least 1 upper alphabetic character, at least 1 lower alphabetic character and at least 1 numeric character. The following special characters are also accepted as valid characters and can be part of the Password: % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (under score). The first character of the Password can be an alphabetic, numeric, or a valid special character.

• Language - This is one of the available languages of the manager.d. In the Authentication Dialog box, enter your Login and Password.

The default Login and Password are the following:

The entry boxes are case sensitive.

Profile

Default User Id UID

Default Password Identifier

Default User Security Privileges

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

as shown in Figure 3-4

Figure 3-4 Details of the authentication dialog box

e. Click Login button or Enter key and a warning message as shown in Figure 3-5 and then the ZIC application starts opening its page as shown in Figure 3-6 loading the NE information.

– CONF (Configuration)

– NETADMIN (Network Administration)

– SEC (Security)

– PROV (Provisioning)

– READ (Reading)

– DEBUG (Debugging)

– NOTMOUT (No Inactivity Timeout)

Profile



3-7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-5 ZIC browser loading

Figure 3-6 ZIC browser start (example)

Starting from left to right, the Page header presents the company logo, the equipment description, the user ID and the Logout hyperlink which allows to close the session.

The Alarm table presents the detailed list of the current alarm. Each row refers about the alarm abbreviation (e.g. LOF) and the involved coordinates entity (e.g. OTPORT-1-1-15-C1) both for TDM and Data alarms. The last one is also a hyperlink for opening the alarm page.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Menu description

This section describes all the menu and the relevant menu options available. The description is based on the menu structure.

In the Chapter 4, “Tree area” the access to the resources by the tree area is described.

Table 3-1 Application menu bar

In compliance with your access rights and the management state, you may or not have access to some of the management options described below. The management options that cannot be accessed aren’t represented.

Control Plane -> CP TDM Transmission

-> Routing

Signalling

Equipment Create Shelf

-> Refresh Tree

Connection TDM

Data -> Create XC -> P2P

PB

Search/Delete XC

Data Traffic descriptor

VLAN Profile

Color Profile

ASAP list

Search

Switch -> DB filtering -> Dynamic F-DB

Static UR-DB

Static MF-DB

Dynamic MF-DB

-> Bridge -> Configuration

Virtual LAN

IGMP Mng



3-9

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Group Segregation Mng

Xcom NE Gen. Config -> NE discovery

DCC -> Network IF

OSI ULC Report

XC Overhead

DCN Phys. If IP Address

-> LAN manag

ARPCACHE Mng

-> IP Tunnel

Network Domain IP Route

Gateway Map Table

-> NSAP Report

WDM Report

OSI NE Area

TARP Mng TARP Report

-> TARP Cache

TARP LDB

Alarm TCA Profile

ASAP Mng

-> ALM CUTOFF

ALM Resynch

Protection EQPS

APS

UPSR

Synchronization

Bits Modify BITS-0

-> Modify BITS-1

Modify BITS-OUT

Synchronization Modify Synch

-> Modify Out Synch

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modify Switch Synch

System Management

Initialize and Upgrade

Initialize System -> With New Release

-> With Old Release

In-Service Upgrade

Upgrade Status

-> Start Upgrade

Stop Upgrade

Remove Old Upgrade

DB Management DataBase Perform DB Backup

-> Cancel DB Backup

Restore DB

DB Information

-> Remote File Perform Copy

Cancel Copy

File Information

Network Element

Set Site Identifier

Network Time Protocol

Security User Account -> Change Password

Information

Administration Account -> Create Account

Change Account

Default Settings

-> Current Session



3-11

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Following are the Menu and Sub-Menu options available in the Table 3-1, “Application menu bar” (p. 3-8).• Control Plane - Allows the operator to manage the Control Plane Transport ports

within the equipment.– CP TDM - has the following options:

• Transmission - Allows to manage the SONET connections and TDM tunnel timeslots.

• Routing - Allows to manage a static IP route from the IP routing table.• Signaling - Allows to manage the parameter for CP tunnel bandwidth profile

for Packet Switch Capability (PSC).• Equipment - Allows to manage the equipment configuration:

– Create Shelf - Allows to set a new shelf in the rack.– Refresh Tree - Allows to update the page area tree.

• Connection - This menu allows to manage (provisioning, service type etc.) the client/line traffic. – TDM - Allows to set the SONET service.– Data - Allows to set the Ethernet Point-to-Point cross-connection service.

• Create XC - Allows to manage the cross-connections.– P2P - Allows to set Point-to-Point cross-connections.– PB - Allows to set Provider Bridge cross-connections.

• Search/Delete XC - Allows to perform the searching and deleting procedures.• Data - This menu allows the operator to set the service for Data traffic:

– Traffic descriptor - To set the operation mode.– VLAN Profile - To set the Virtual LAN profile.

Command Privileges

Audit

Log Settings

Logout

Tools -> TL1 Console

NE TL1 Param

Help About

Help On Line

NE TL1 Syntax

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Color Profile - To set the signal color policing.– ASAP list - To show and manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.– Search - To find the resource type in a NE.– Switch - Allows to configure the Filtering database.

• DB Filtering - Allows Filtering the database.– Dynamic F-DB– Static UR-DB– Static MF-DB– Dynamic MF-DB

• IGMP FGM Reg.– Bridge - To configure Virtual LAN and general Bridge Behavior.

• Configuration - To configure a bridge .• Virtual LAN

– IGMP Mng - Allows to manage the Internet Group Management Protocol.– Group Segregation Mng - Allows to set the segregation state, in order to exclude

the Port from the exchanging of frames with a given list of ports.• Xcom - Allows to configure and set the external communication for NE management

interfaces.– NE Configuration - Allows to retrieve the system's output response (site) header.

• NE Discovery– DCC - Allows to specifies the reference of DCC Channel Line or Section.

• Network IF - Allows the operator to modify the various network interface parameters on a specified DCC channel on an optical port for data communication purposes.

• OSI ULC Report - Allows to modify OSI upper layers stack parameters which are common to all the stack interfaces of the NE.

• XC Overhead - Allows to modify the cross-connection overheads.– DCN Physical Interface - Allows to specify the supported Layer 3 (network

layer) of the OSI Data Communication Network (DCN).• IP Address - Retrieves TCP/IP stack parameters.• LAN manag. - Allows to modify the various network interface parameters

associated with the customer LAN.• ARPCACHE Mng - Allows the operator to get all the entries contained in the

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache on the customer LAN interface.– IP Tunnel - Allows the operator to manage an IP tunnel instance on the NE.– Network Domain - Specifies the following sub-options:

• IP Route - Allows the operator to enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table, by CP.



3-13

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Gateway Map Table - Allows the operator to manage a static entry from the TL1 Gateway mapping table.

• NSAP Report - Instructs the NE to provide routing database information that is supported by Layer 3 (network layer) of the OSI Data Communication Network (DCN).

• WDM Report - Retrieves a list of all immediate OSC neighbors to the local network element (node or NE).

• OSI NE ARE - Retrieves the parameters of a configured OSIAREA that the NE is part of.

– TARP Mng - Allows the user to manage the TL1 Address resolution Protocol (TARP) parameters.• TARP Report - Allows the user to retrieve the TL1 Address resolution

Protocol (TARP) parameters.• TARP Cache - Allows the user to retrieve all of the current TARP Data Cache

entries.• TARP LDB - It retrieves the TARP Loop Detection Buffer (LDB).

• Alarms - Allows the operator to manage entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile). An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or settable by the operator. – TCA Profile - Allows to configure and display the TCA (Threshold Crossing

Alarm) profile.– ASAP Mng - Allows to configure and display the ASAP.– ALM CUTOFF - Allows to silence the office audible alarm indications– ALM Resynch. - Allows to update the alarm database to the current alarm

situation.• Protection - Allows the operator to manage the available protection systems.

– EQPS - Allows to manage the 1:1 Equipment Protection Switching for equipment unit.

– APS - Allows to manage the Automatic Protection Switching setting the relevant configuration.

– UPSR- Allows to manage the Unidirectional Path Switched Ring traffic protection.

– BLSR - Allows to manage the Bidirectional Line Switched Ring traffic protection.• Synchronization - Allows the operator to manage the ports dedicated to BITS

(Building Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock distribution purposes. A BITS output reference is a DS1 signal. – BITS - Allows to modify the characteristics (BITS-0 as Primary and BITS-1 as

Secondary) and the outgoing port of reference clock.• Modify BITS-0 - Allows the page to edit bit 0 related to a given shelf.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Modify BITS-1 - Allows the page to search and edit bit 1 related to a given shelf.

• Modify BITS-OUT - Allows the page to search and edit bit out related to a given shelf.

– Synchronization - Allows to modify the parameters of the synchronization system.• Modify Synch. - Opens the "Modify Synchronization" page.• Modify Out Synch. - Opens the "Modify Synchronization Outgoing" page.• Modify Switch Synch. - Opens the Modify "Synchronization Switch" page.

• System Management - Contains menu item and submenu for all users and for administrator users.– Initialize and Upgrade

• Initialize System - The options are:– With New Release - For a general upgrading of the software.– With Old Release - For a software refresh.

• In-Service Upgrade - Allows to manage the in-service upgrading.– Upgrade Status - For retrieving the status of the ongoing upgrade

procedure.– Start Upgrade - For preparing the system for activation of the new release.– Stop Upgrade - For altering the in-service upgrade procedure and reverts

the system to the state before the Start Upgrade option was issued.– Remove Old Upgrade - For making the current release software as

permanent active software.– DB Management - Allows to manage the Database related operations:

• DataBase - For Database management– Perform DB Backup - Backs up the primary backup data base to the

secondary backup data base– Cancel DB Backup - Cancels (aborts) a database backup currently in

progress– Restore DB - Copies the backup database stored on secondary backup

database to the primary backup database and resets the system to activate the new database.

– DB Information - Reads the database label of the selected backup database stored on the NE.

• Remote File - For Data Base Remote File Server management– Perform Copy - Copies secondary backup database on the NE from/to

specified locations on a Remote File Server (RFS).– Cancel Copy - Interrupts an in-progress file transfer previously initiated.



3-15

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– File Information - This is used to read information related to transferred files on a Remote File Server.

• Network Element - For retrieving general system level configuration information consisting of: system type, software release identifier, software release date, matrix size, system restart status.

• Set Site Identifier - For setting the Site Identifier (SID) code that is compared to any Target Identifier (TID) value entered in a text field.

• Network Time Protocol• Security - Contains menu item and submenu for all users and for administrator users.

– User Account • Change Password - Activates the "Change Password" page• Account Information - Activates the "Account Information" page

– Administration - Specifies the administration of the users.• Accounts

– Create an Account - To create a new user account– Change an Account - To change an existing account– Default Settings - Displays the default settings

• Current Sessions - Displays the summary of the current sessions• Commands Privileges - Displays the list of TL1 commands• Audit - Opens the Retrieve Audit Log panel to retrieve the audit log• Log Settings - Displays the Log Attributes panel to modify the Log attributes.

– Logout - Allows to exit the session• Tools - It opens a Telnet console for TL1 commands.

– TL1 Console - Opens the Telnet console– NE TL1 Param - Opens NE TL1 Parameters panel

• Help - Allows the operator to obtain information about the application.– About - The software version– Help On Line - Allows the operator to locally read the CT Operation Guide in

HTML format.– NE TL1 Syntax - Allows the operator to obtain information about the TL1

command syntax.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment menu

Purpose

This menu allows the operator to manage the equipment configuration. The menu options are:• Create Shelf - Allows to set a new shelf in the rack• Refresh Tree - Allows to update the page area tree

Create shelf

The Create a new Shelf tab displays the following as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Create shelf configuration

The Create a new Shelf panel displays the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Select the label (with associated icon) and the number inside the

rack that is presented in the tree. The options are:– SHELF - This is the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160 subrack and is shown in

the tree area– OMD - This is the OM44 OR OMD88 subrack. The label is set at SHELF-x-x or

OMD-x-x respectively

The second combo-box sets the first number presented in the tree; i.e. SHELF-1-x as for the picture. The valid range is 1-7.

The third choice sets the second number presented in the tree; i.e. SHELF-1-1. The valid range is 1-9.• Provisioned Type - This is the type of the shelf actually provisioned. The options are:

– SWTCH– ROADM– ILA

Equipment menuMenu bar


3-17

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– UILA• Automatic In Service Mode - This specifies the Automatic in service mode to which

the equipment is set. The values are:– NOWAIT - No condition notifies the module is unplugged.– AINS - No condition is sent due to module unplugged.

• Primary State - This specifies the primary state to which the equipment is set. The values are:– IS - In Service– OOS - Out Of Service

• SHELF Identificator Value - This parameter specifies, for the Shelf Types = UNVRLS320/160, a value that is equal to the one set by the HW tool mounted on the Shelf and to set the ID of the Shelf.

• SHELF Role - Specifies the provisioned shelf role for UNVRLS320/160 shelf types. The values are:– MAIN - Main Shelf of the NE– NOMAIN - Extension Shelf of the NE

• SHELF WDM Role– WDMMASTER– WDMSLAVE

Refresh tree

The refresh tree allows updating of the left side of the browser page when changes have occurred.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connection menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connection menu

Purpose

The connection menu allows the operator to manage (provisioning, service type etc.) the client/line traffic. The menu options are:• TDM - Allows to set the SONET service• Data - Allows to set the Point-to-Point cross-connection services. The options are:

– Create XC• P2P - Allows to set Point-to-Point cross-connections.• PB - Allows to set Provider Bridge cross-connections.

– Search/delete XC - Allows to perform the searching and deleting procedures.

TDM

Select Connection -> TDM as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Connection - TDM

The Search tab displays the Search Cross-Connections panel that contains the following:• Search Type - Allows to select XConnection or Protection legs:

– Using Specific STS Type Commands (RTRV-CONF-STSn or RTRV-CRS-STS-<rate>) for a searching identified by the STSn specific type declared in the next STS Type combo-box.

– Using Circuit Identifier (RTRV-CKTID) for a searching identified by the circuit identifier.



3-19

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Using Generic STS Commands (RTRV-CRS) for a searching identified by the generic type of the STSn. Its selection arranges the panel accordingly.

– STS Type - The combo-box allows to select one of the items STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C in order to chose the hierarchical level of the signal.

– Circuit Type - The combo-box allows to select one of the items “Cross-connection” or “Conference” in order to chose the type of connection. It is displayed only if Using a Specific STS Type Commands is selected for Search Type.

• Retrieve Command - Specifies the TL1 Command used for the searching procedure set in the Search Type field.

• STS Access Identifier - The entry box allows to select one of the available STSn. It is displayed only if Using a Specific STS Type Commands or Using a Generic STS Command are selected for Search Type. The Select hyperlink opens a popup window, which allows to search available STSn of the selected STS Type.

The Search link is to start the search operation to filter the results.

Data

Select Connection -> Data -> Create XC -> P2P as shown in Figure 3-9

Figure 3-9 Connection - Data - Create XC - P2P

The xconnection tab displays the P2P data connection panel that contains the following parameters:• Type - The field shows the type of connection BIDIR or UNIDIR.• From - The entry box allows to enter the first point of the connection.

Click Select button it is possible to select one of the source port.• To - The entry box allows to enter the second point of the connection.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Select button it is possible to select one of the destination port.• Front in label - The entry box allows to digit the user label for the Inflow input

direction.• Front out label - The entry box allows to digit the user label for the Inflow output

direction.• Back in label - The entry box allows to digit the user label for the Outflow input

direction.• Back out label - The entry box allows to digit the user label for the Outflow output

direction.

Select Connection -> Data -> Create XC -> PB as shown in Figure 3-9

Figure 3-10 Connection - Data - Create XC - PB

The Provider data connection page contains the following parameters:• Topology - Allows choosing of XC type. Following are the possible options:

– UNI-UNI - Allows to create an XC from one User-Interface to another User-Interface, passing through the Bridge domain.

– UNI-NNI - Allows to create an XC from one User-Interface to a Network-Interface, where the NNI interface is towards the Bridge domain.



3-21

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– NNI-UNI - Allows to create an XC from a Network-Interface to a User-Interface where the NNI interface is towards the Bridge domain.

– UNI-UNI-BIDIR - Allows to create an XC from a User-Interface to another User-Interface, in bi-directional mode connected, passing through the Bridge domain.

• Port ethernet ingress - It is the name of the “input” Ethernet Port. • Port ethernet egress - It is the name of the “output" Ethernet Port.• TRAFFIC SECTION

– Ethernet traffic descriptor - It is the name of the associated “User" traffic descriptor (TID). This option allows to choose and associate a User traffic descriptor to the data flow (ETS InFlow).

– Provider traffic descriptor - It is the name of the associated “Provider" traffic descriptor; This option has the same meaning of the above, but in this case the associated TID must be “null" (for Provider InFlow).

• CLASSIFIER SECTION– Priority bits - It allows to chose the prioritization of an Ethernet data flow. Values

are “dontCare”, “untagged”, “value” and “range”.– VLAN - It allows to manage the VLAN Registration on the Node; i.e. the

registration of the VLAN under consideration on a group of Ports (membership) on which this VLAN may be present (received/transmitted). Values are “dontCare”, “untagged”, “value” and “range”.

• BRIDGE MANAGEMENT– S-VID - It is a setting of “Bridge management” which allows to set a name of the

associated “Stacked-VLAN-ID" that will be inserted/extracted into/from the “Provider"-Frame.

– Layer 2 control frames (0x) - It allows to enable or disable the Protocol Frames.– Policing mode - It allows to set the policing on the ETS traffic (ETS InFlow);

possible pull-down options are “disabled”, “colorBlind” or “colorAware”.– Color profile - It allows indicating the name of the association between the

incoming S-VLAN priorities and the forwarded frames colouring (for scheduling purposes, inside the bridge).

– VLAN pop - It allows to pop out the “Stacked-VLAN" shim fields of the ethernet frame. SVLAN tags transport information used by an external provider network; possible values: “disabled" or “enabled".

• VLAN PUSH SECTION– VLAN push - It allows to insert (disabled) or remove (enabled) the

VLAN/SVLAN tags on/from the frames.• USER LABEL SECTION

– Label inflow ethernet - It allows to indicate the user label (optional) of the inflow to be connected.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Label outflow ethernet - It allows to indicate the user label (optional) of the outflow to be connected.

– Label inflow provider - It allows to indicate the provider label (optional) of the inflow to be connected.

– Label outflow provider - It allows to indicate the provider label (optional) of the outflow to be connected.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save & exit which saves the selections and returns to the previous page.– Save & continue which saves the selections and remains in the current page.

If no Data services is provided, the following warning message is displayed to inform that bridge configuration must be provided.

Figure 3-11 Connection page - PB wizard - Warning message

Search/Delete XC

This option allows the user to search and/or delete a cross-connections.

Select Connection -> Data -> Search/Delete XC option as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Search/Delete XC

The xconnection tab displays the data connection panel that contains the following:• Topology - The combo-box allows to choose the XC type. Following are the possible

options:– P2P is an XC point-to-point.– UNI-UNI is an XC from a User-Interface to another User-Interface, passing

through the Bridge domain.– UNI-NNI is an XC from a User-Interface to a Network-Interface, where the NNI

interface is towards the Bridge domain.



3-23

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– NNI-UNI is an XC from a Network-Interface to a User-Interface where the NNI interface is towards the Bridge domain.

• Ingress - Name of the “input” Port. Click Select button to perform a selection. After the selection procedure, the chosen value is be reported.

• Egress - Name of the “output” Port. Click Select button to perform a selection. After the selection procedure, the chosen value is be reported.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Search which starts the searching process about the selection– Clear which delete the cross-connections and returns to the previous page.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menu

Purpose

The data menu allows the operator to set the service for Data traffic. The menu options are:• Traffic desc - To set the operation mode• VLAN profile - To set the Virtual LAN profile• Color profile - To set the signal color policing• ASAP list - To show and manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile• Search - To find the resource type in a NE• Switch - To configure the Filtering database.• Bridge - To configure Virtual LAN and general Bridge Behavior.• IGMP Mng - To manage the Internet Group Management Protocol.• Group Segregation Mng - To set the segregation state, in order to exclude the Port

from the exchanging of frames with a given list of ports.

Traffic descriptor

Select Data -> Traffic Descriptor as shown in the Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Traffic descriptor - Data

To configure a new traffic descriptor, click Create to configure a data traffic descriptor tab. See “Create Traffic Descriptor- Data” (p. 5-60).

Clicking on User label available hyperlink the following page will appear.

a) without ghost objects

b) with ghost objects

Data menuMenu bar


3-25

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-14 Data page - Traffic descriptor details

In the Traffic desc. panel the following field are shown:• User Label - It refers to the previously chosen resource. It is possible to enter a

further User label.• Service type - It is the current identification of the traffic, in terms of international

standard codifications; The possible values are:– bestEffortService– guaranteedService– regulatedService

• CIR - Committed information rate. It is the normal medium rate (expressed in kb/sec) of the data flow (Effective Bandwidth)

• PIR - Peak information rate. It is the maximum rate (expressed in kb/sec) up to which the source can transmit for a short time period and it ranges from 3 to physical-line-rate of the relative Port .

• CBS - Committed burst size. It is the committed number of bytes for which the source may transmit the PIR.

• PBS - Peak burst size. It is the maximum number of bytes for which the source may transmit the PIR.

The hyperlinks present at the bottom of the panel are:– Cancel: To delete the selected Traffic Descriptor.– Save & Exit: To save and exit from the Traffic Descriptor.– Save & Continue: To save and continue the Traffic Descriptor settings.

VLAN profile

VLAN registration is not be applicable to MAC Bridge case. Select Data -> VLAN profile as shown in Figure 3-15.• User Label - This is the name of the VLAN profile.• Ethernet type - The value identifies the network provider and has to be 2-bytes long

in hexadecimal notation; the third non-included byte is forced by default to “0x".

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Validating the check box Show ghost objects, the column State is shown where the status of the VLAN is displayed as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 VLAN profile with ghost objects

The Delete hyperlink allows to select one or more VLAN profile to delete from the list.

The Create hyperlink allows to select one or more VLAN profile in order to start the creation process. See “Create VLAN” (p. 5-64).

Color profile

The prioritization of an Ethernet data flow can be indicated on the three user-priority bits (802.1p) of the “Tagged-Ethernet" frame and also on the 3 “provider-priority" bits of the “Stacked-Vlan" frame.

Eight levels of User-priority can be defined: pri0 to pri7, where pri0 is the minimum and pri7 the maximum. The relayed traffic towards a generic “Provider Network” can be “prioritized" using the “Default” or “Regenerated” UserPriority” settings.

Sixty four levels of DSCP can be defined: DSCP0 to DSCP63, where DSCP0 is the minimum and DSCP63 is the maximum.

The policing is a mechanism to check that the data flow is respecting the traffic contract, providing to “cut" or to forward the incoming traffic.• “Disabled" means that no policing is carried out.• “Color-Blind" means that the policing is based upon the Traffic Descriptor (TD),

without taking into account the Priority and CoS.• “Color-Aware" (not yet operative), means that the policing takes into account the

Traffic Descriptor (TD), the UserPriority and the CoS, by means of a defined “Color Profile” (not yet operative).

According to the traffic contract, to the policing mode, and to the available bandwidth, the priority of a data flow into the Provider-network is assigned by the traffic scheduler of the system.

In case that the policing is in “Color-aware" mode, the Provider-prioritization granularity is made deeper, taking into account the single VLAN-priorities, that can have assigned to any of them a green or yellow or red color.

Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 shows the relationships among Stacked-VLAN, Traffic Descriptor, Policing Mode and Color Profile.

Data menuMenu bar


3-27

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ETS InFlow:

Table 3-2 Traffic Descriptor, Policing Mode and Color Profile for INFLOW resource:

Traffic Descriptor Policing Mode Color Profile Provider - Coloring

Best effort “Disabled” only “Unbound” YELLOW

“Color-blind” YELLOW or RED

Guaranteed Disabled only Unbound GREEN

Color-blind GREEN or RED

Guaranteed(2) “Disabled” only “Unbound” GREEN

“Color-blind” GREEN or RED

Regulated “Disabled” Unbound GREEN

Bound GREEN or YELLOW

“Color-blind” Unbound GREEN or YELLOW or RED

“Color-aware” Bound as assigned by the “Color Profile"

Regulated(2) Disabled Unbound GREEN

Color-blind Bound GREEN or YELLOW

Color-aware Unbound GREEN or YELLOW or RED







Background “Disabled” only “Unbound” YELLOW

“Color-blind” YELLOW or RED

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ETHOutFlow

Table 3-3 Prioritization for OUTFLOW resource with “Stacked-VLAN management

Select Data -> Color Profile as shown in Figure 3-16

Figure 3-16 Color profile

The available parameters are:• User Label - Traffic descriptor name• Priority 0 to Priority 7 - Prioritization of an Ethernet data flow can be indicated by 8

levels of User-priority, where Priority 0 is the minimum and Priority 7 the maximum, according to these conventions:– green color - Maximum User-priority– red color - Minimum User-priority– yellow color - Mean User-priority

The Create link is to configure a new color profile. See “Create color profile” (p. 5-66).

ASAP list

Select Data -> ASAP List option as shown in Figure 3-17.

Stacked VLAN Management Priority Mode VLAN Provider-Prioritization

Unbound - no provider-prioritization

Bound Color-blind the frames are passed without any information about Provider's colors

Color-aware green packets are assigned to the priority as defined into the “Stack Priority" fieldyellow packets are assigned to the priority as defined into the “Stack Priority Yellow" field

Data menuMenu bar


3-29

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-17 ASAP list

The ASAP list page contains a list of real User Label that can be displayed clicking on the relevant hyperlink:• no alarm (see “Data page - ASAP no alarm list” (p. 3-30)) • primary alarms (see “Data page - ASAP primary alarms List” (p. 3-30)) • path alarms (see “Data page - ASAP path alarm list” (p. 3-31)) • all alarms (see “Data page - ASAP all alarm list” (p. 3-31))

Select Cancel to go back to the previous window as shown in Figure 3-18.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-18 Data page - ASAP no alarm list

Figure 3-19 Data page - ASAP primary alarms List

Data menuMenu bar


3-31

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-20 Data page - ASAP path alarm list

Figure 3-21 Data page - ASAP all alarm list

For the alarm acronym meaning, please refer to Chapter 6, “Abbreviations”.

The Create link allows to configure a new user label for a new ASAP profile. For the information relevant to the ASAP configuration procedure. See “Create ASAP list” (p. 5-68).

Search

Select Data -> Search option that allows to search a resource (or a group of) as shown in Figure 3-22.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-22 Data - Search

The Search tab displays the Range and the Search criteria panels. The Range panel displays the following parameters:• From: and To - Allows to limit the search into the indicated range of resource’s

indexes. After the selection procedure, the selected value is reported.

The Search criteria panel displays the following parameters: • Port Type - The combo-box allows to select the type of Ethernet port. The values are:

– LOCAL - To set as search parameter for the local Ethernet Port.– REMOTE - To set as search parameter for the remote Ethernet Port.

• Status - The values are:– UP - To search the port in-service.– DOWN - To search the port out-of-service.

• Client Type - The Client Type value displays the following values:– ETS (Ethernet Transparent Service) - a provider service that emulates the

functionality of a traditional Local Area Network.– ETB (Ethernet Bridge) - Representing the Ethernet Bridge Port that has been

configured to work in “auto learning" modality; i.e. it is a resource of the bridge functionality.

– LINKAGG - For Link Aggregation System. The DATA system supports the Link Aggregation at the Ethernet side, as specified in IEEE Std. 802.3ad-2000; it is a technique to aggregate many data streams into a single logical link. The resulting aggregate link will be treated by the system (with regard to instances about network protections, etc.) as a single link. It permits to overcome the bandwidth limitation of the single ethernet interfaces, or to protect the traffic. Permitted port rates to be aggregated are 1 Gbps and 10 Gbps.

Data menuMenu bar


3-33

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Data Card - The combo-box allows to select one of the data unit available in the system; each data unit is identified by a label representing the unit and the relevant position inside the rack, the shelf and slot occupation respectively (e.g., “PP10GE-1-1-9”).

The panel contains the following two hyperlinks:

The Search link is to start the search procedure

The Stop link is to stop the searching procedure.

The Preferences hyperlink displays the preferences for Ethernet Port, Inflows, and Outflows as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Data page - Search - Preferences

Select Preferences hyperlink to set the global maximum width of the ranges (i.e., the meaning is “xxx range width”) over which a resource can be searched. It is then applied in the Search panel. The parameters are:• Ethernet Port - Specifies the ethernet access.• InFlow - Specifies the internal resource used into an ethernet port, in order to define

and characterize an incoming ethernet data flow. • OutFlow - Specifies the internal resource used into an ethernet port, in order to define

and characterize an outgoing ethernet data flow.

The window has the following hyperlinks:

The Cancel is to close the page without changing the current settings.

The Save & Exit is to apply the ranges and return to the previous page.

The Restore defaults is to apply the default ranges and return to the previous page.

Switch

At Switch level is possible to configure the Filtering database.This menu option is joined with the relevant choices and sub choices:• DB filtering to manage the Filtering Data Base table as:

– Dynamic F-DB (Filtering Data Base): Is used to manage when unknown incoming frames are flooded on all ports of the bridge.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Static UF-DB (Unicast Filtering Data Base): The connection instances are manually entered by the operator for only towards one Port.

– Static MF-DB (Multicast Filtering Data Base): The connection instances are manually entered by the operator for only towards two or more egress Ports.

– Dynamic MF-DB (Multicast Filtering DataBase): It manages the instances, in particular the IGMP dynamic instances.

• IGMP FGM Reg.: It forces the transmission of an IGMP Report to the IP-Multicast Router.

Figure 3-24 Switch -> DB filtering -> Dynamic F-DB

Figure 3-25 Switch -> DB filtering -> Static UF-DB

The page is made up of one panel. The available parameters in the panel are:

VLANID: It is an identifier of the VLAN. The Search hyperlink starts the searching procedure. After the procedure execution, the chosen value will be reported.

MAC Address: The text box allows to digit the MAC Address of a resource.

In the center of the panel there is a combo-box for the resource selection. Allowable values are:

LAG Group (Link AGgregation) or one of the available data unit (10xANY-1-1-24).

It is joined with the two entry boxes:

• Available port on board: It lists the ports relevant to the previous selection.

• Allowed to go: select from "Available" list the egress port that the frame as specified by the (VID, Mac Address, Receive Port) set should go.

Data menuMenu bar


3-35

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

They can be copied or removed from one of the entry box using the left or right arrow buttons available between the two entry boxes.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: To close the page and turn back to the previous page without the changes.– Save & Exit: To save the settings and leave the page.

Figure 3-26 Switch -> DB filtering -> Static MF-DB

The page contains the same objects as in the previous paragraph.

Figure 3-27 Switch -> DB filtering -> Dynamic MF-DB

• IGMP FGM Reg.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Data -> Switch -> IGMP FGM Reg. (Forced Group Membership) option the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-28 Switch -> IGMP FGM Reg.

The page is made up of one panel. The available parameters in the panel are:– VLANID: It is an identifier of the VLAN. The Select hyperlink starts the

searching procedure. After the procedure execution, the chosen value is reported.– IP Address Multicast Group: The text box allows to digit the IP MAC Address

whose incoming packets are to be forwarded to the relevant associated port.– Record Type: This field reports the incoming/outgoing Ports associated to the

relevant VLAN ID and MAC-Address couple (not used: it is set to exclude by the system).

– IP Address Multicast Group Source: The text box allows to digit the IP MAC Address of the source.

In the center of the panel there is a combo-box for the resource selection. Allowable values are:

• LAG Group (Link Aggregation)• One of the available data unit (10XANY-1-1-24)

It is joined with the two entry boxes:• Port on Board: It lists the ports relevant to the previous selection.• Port List: It shows the egress port previously selected from Port on Board list, that

the frame as specified by the (VID, Mac Address, Receive Port) set should go.


The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: To close the page and turn back to the previous page without the changes.– Save & Exit: To save the settings and leave the page.

Bridge

At Bridge level is possible to configure Virtual LAN and general Bridge Behavior. The menu options are:• Configuration

Data menuMenu bar


3-37

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Virtual LAN

Bridge - configuration

Select Data -> Bridge -> Configuration option as shown in Figure 3-29.

Figure 3-29 Bridge page - configuration

The Bridge tab displays the Bridge Configuration panel that contains the following parameters:• Bridge Type - Indicates what types of mechanism this bridge performs. The values

are:– Bridge802.1ad - Provider Bridge Type– Bridge802.1Q - Virtual Bridge Type

• Protocol Type indicates the Type of Spanning Tree protocol. The possible values are:– manualDisable - It is used to disable the protocol on the root bridge. It maps the

"manualDisable" value of the optics in STP Type attribute.– STP - It is used to enable STP and synchronously RSTP, MSTP are disabled.– RSTP - It is used to enable RSTP and synchronously STP, MSTP are disabled.– MSTP - It is used to enable MSTP and synchronously STP, RSTP are disabled.

The page has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel - Allows the user to cancel the operation and turn back to the previous

page.– Save & continue - Allows the user to apply the changes and continue with other

setting.– Save & exit - Allows the user to apply the changes and turn back to the previous

page.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bridge - Virtual LAN

Figure 3-30 Bridge page -> Virtual LAN

The page is made up of two panels and one table. The VLAN panel contains the following attributes:

– Board Selection: The combo-box allows to select one of the data unit available in the system; each data unit is identified by a label representing the unit and the relevant position inside the rack, the shelf and slot occupation respectively (e.g. “ 10XANY-1-1-24”).

– VLAN Range From: To: These item text boxes permit to find the VLANs specified in that range, by clicking on Search functional button. A range of VLAN-Id to be searched can be defined (e.g. from 151 to 201), the range cannot be greater than 100; default is 1 to 100.

The VLAN table reports in tabular form, the VLAN identifiers, in the specified range, already registered on the selected Data Board and, in the same row the relevant existing Ethernet Ports on which a VLAN is registered.

Note: In the case of Virtualized, all the existing (and activated) ETB ports (and ETB LAGs, in case of “Agg Group Management”) of the board are tabled. While in the case of Provider Bridge all the existing (and activated) ETS and ETB ports (and LAGs, in case of “Agg Group Management”) of the board are presented.

IGMP Mng

IP hosts to report their host group memberships to any immediately neighboring multicast routers use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), a multicasting protocol in the Internet protocols family. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP datagram, with an IP protocol number of 2. IGMP has versions IGMP v1, v2 and v3. From the application menu bar, select Data -> IGMP Mng and the following page appears.

Data menuMenu bar


3-39

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-31 Data -> IGMP Mng

The page is made up of one panel and one table.

The available parameters in the VLAN Range panel are:– From: and To: a range of VLAN-Id to be searched can be defined, the range

cannot be greater than 50; default is 1 to 50. Subsequently, after clicking on Search hyperlink, the VLAN’s already associated to an IGMP instance are displayed in the table.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: To close the page and go back to the previous page.– Search: To start the searching procedure.

Group Segregation Mng

The function of this option is to set the segregation state, in order to exclude the Port from the exchanging of frames with a given list of ports. Only ETB ports in case of MAC/Virtual Bridge, ETB and ETS ports for Provider Bridge case. In case of Virtual or Provider Bridge, the ports to be segregated can be also registered over the same VLAN. In this way a segregated port can exchange frames only with a non-segregated port.

Note: Segregation is applicable also for Link Aggregation Groups.

This function is used to save band and resources on the node and on the ports, and also to improve the security and the privacy of the transmission.

From the application menu bar, select Data -> Group Segregation Mng and the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Data menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-32 Group Segregation management page

The page is made up of one panel and one table. The available parameter in the Port Segregation Group Management panel is:

– Group Status: It activates the Segregation capability of the node. Alternative possible values are:• Create: It activates the Segregation capability of the node• Destroy: It deactivates the Segregation capability of the node

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: It allows to cancel the operation.– Send: It allows to forward the command in order to activate (Create) or deactivate

(Destroy) the Segregation capability of the node.

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-41

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menu

Purpose

The Xcom menu allows the operator to configure and set the external communication for NE management interfaces. The menu options are:• NE Gen. Config - Allows to retrieve the system's output response (site) header. • DCC - Allows to specifies the reference of DCC Channel Line or Section.• DCN Physical Interface - Allows to specify the supported Layer 3 (network layer) of

the OSI Data Communication Network (DCN).• IP Tunnel - Allows to manage an IP tunnel instance on the NE.• Network Domain - Allows to enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table,

to instruct the NE to provide routing database information that is supported by network layer of the OSI DCN, to retrieve a list of all immediate OSC neighbors to the local network element and retrieve the parameters of a configured OSIAREA that the NE is part of.

• TARP Management - Allows to manage the TL1 Address resolution Protocol (TARP) parameters.

NE gen. config

The NE Gen. Config menu option has only one sub-menu option:• NE Discovery

NE discovery

This is used to retrieve the system's output response (site) header. Normally, the output response header consists of the site identifier (SID) and the current date and time.

Select Xcom -> NE Gen. Config -> NE Discovery option as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 NE discovery - Site Header 1

• The Site Header tab displays the Site Header panel that contains the following parameters:

• PC - To determine the PC flag (1301 for auto discovery); it also returns the NE type.

Click Search hyperlink a second Site Header panel shows the following information:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Site ID - The site identifier.• Date - This shows the current date in the <year>-<month>-<day> format.• Time - This shows the current time in the <hour>-<minute>-<second> format.• NE Type - This shows the type of NE.• NE software release number - This shows the NE software release number.

Figure 3-34 NE discovery - Site header 2

DCC channel

The DCC menu option has the following two sub-menus:• Network IF - Allows the operator to modify the various network interface parameters

on a specified DCC channel on an optical port for data communication purposes. • OSI ULC - Allows to modify OSI upper layers stack parameters that are common to

all the stack interfaces of the NE.• XC Overhead - Allows to modify the cross-connection overhead parameters on

specified DCC channel on an optical port for data communication purpose.

Network IF

It allows the operator to modify the various network interface parameters on a specified DCC channel on an optical port for data communication purposes. The network interface must be first provisioned on the line or section DCC of the specific STSn facility. The DCC is identified as STSn and the DCCCHNL parameter.

Select the Xcom -> DCC -> Network IF option as shown in Figure 3-35.

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-43

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-35 DCC channel - Network IF

The DCC -> Network IF option displays a list of current configured OCn (Access Identifier) with the type of DCC Channel and a panel NE Interface Details.

The NE Interface Details panel contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Specifies the Access Identifier of the facility.• DCC Channel - Specifies the DCC channel (Line or Section).• DCC Mode - Specifies the DCC Mode.• Lower Layer Mode - Specifies the Lower Layer Mode.

The panel has Save hyperlink to save the settings.

OSI ULC report

It allows to modify OSI upper layers stack parameters which are common to all the stack interfaces of the NE (i. e., all the Line and Section DCC interfaces and the Customer LAN).

Select Xcom -> DCC -> OSI ULC Report option as shown in Figure 3-36.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-36 DCC page - OSI ULC report

• The OSI Routing Configuration tab displays the OSI UPPER LAYERS COMMON PARAMETERS panel that contains the following parameters:

• L3ISLEVEL - This is the IS level provisioning. The values are: – 1 - It is a Level 1 IS.– 2 - It is a Level 2 IS.

The Save hyperlinks closes the page and return back to the previous page.

XC overhead

The menu contains the following information as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 XC Overhead

The Overhead Channel Cross Connection tab displays a list of current created XC overhead. It displays the following items:• From: To - By clicking on the left side button, the user can select the DCC channels.• DCCCHNL - This shows two options:

– Line– Section

This panel contains the following hyperlinks:– Delete– Create

IP address

This option is used to retrieve TCP/IP stack parameters. Select Xcom -> DCN Phys. If -> IP Address option as shown in Figure 3-38.

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-45

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-38 DCN Physical Interface page - IP address

The NE Generic Configuration tab displays the IP Address Management panel that contains the following parameters:• MAC ADDRESS (Medium Access Control address) - This is the MAC address

assigned to the card. Note that this parameter can only be read and cannot be modified.• NAME - This is the entry box for the TCP/IP network name of the NE. This value is

not used by the NE in any way at this time, but it may be set so that verification of the IP address can be made at a later time.

• IP Address (Internet Protocol address) - This is the IP address of the NE. The entry box allows to enter the IP address of the NE (value range [1-99, 101-126,128-223] - [0-255] - [0-255] - [0-254]).

• Subnet Mask - This is the entry box for subnet mask of the network the NE is connected to (value range [128-255] - [0-255] - [0-255] - [0-255]). The mask, in binary representation, must contain a contiguous string of 1s (the network portion) and a contiguous string of 0s (the host portion).

The Save hyperlink saves and closes the page.

LAN manag

This option allows the operator to modify the various network interface parameters associated with the customer LAN.

Select Xcom -> DCN Phys. If -> LAN manag. option as shown in Figure 3-39.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-39 DCN physical interface page - LAN management

The Customer LAN Management tab displays the Customer LAN Management panel that contains the following parameters:• OSI Protocol - Determines if the OSI Protocol will be run on the customer LAN or

not. The values are: – N (OSI Protocol is disabled on the Customer LAN)– Y (OSI Protocol is enabled on the Customer LAN)

• Internet Protocol - Determines if the Internet Protocol will be run on the customer LAN. The values are: – N (Internet Protocol is disabled on the Customer LAN)– Y (Internet Protocol is enabled on the Customer LAN)

• Integrated ISIS - Determines if the Integrated IS-IS Protocol will be run on the customer LAN or not. The values are:– N (Integrated IS-IS Protocol is disabled on the customer LAN)– Y (Integrated IS-IS Protocol is enabled on the customer LAN)

• Proxy Address Resolution Protocol - The values are:– Y - Proxy Address Resolution Protocol is enabled on the customer LAN– N - Proxy Address Resolution Protocol is disabled on the customer LAN

• IP address of NE - The IP address of the Network Element

The Save hyperlinks closes the page and returns to the previous page.

ARPCACHE management

This option allows the operator to access all the entries contained in the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache on the customer LAN interface.

Select Xcom -> DCN Phys. If -> ARPCACHE Mng option as shown in Figure 3-40.

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-47

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-40 DCN physical interface page - ARPCACHE management

The ARP CACHE tab displays the following:– # Progressive number for the ARP cache that are populated automatically as a

result of ARP protocol's functionalities– IP ADDRESS - This is the IP address (in dotted-quad format) of the entry in the

ARP cache– MAC ADDRESS - This is the MAC (Medium Access Control) Address of the

entry in the ARP cache

IP tunnel

This option allows the operator to manage an IP tunnel instance on the NE. The IP tunnel that has to be created is specified by its AID. If the AID specified matches any of the ID for existing IP tunnels, an error message is returned in response. The supported encapsulation of the IP tunnel is the Alcatel-Lucent proprietary type: both Standard (RFC3147) and CISCO proprietary encapsulation protocol types are not supported.

Select Xcom -> IP Tunnel option as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 IP tunnel

The IP Tunnel Configuration tab displays the list of current IP tunnels.

This panel contains Create hyperlink to create new IP tunnel.

Network domain

This menu option contains the following choices:• IP Route - Allows the operator to enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing

table, by CP.• Gateway Map Table - Allows the operator to manage a static entry from the TL1

Gateway mapping table. The TL1 Gateway mapping table associates Target Identifiers (TIDs) with IP address / raw terminal port pairs.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• NSAP Report - This instructs the NE to provide routing database information that is supported by Layer 3 (network layer) of the OSI Data Communication Network (DCN).

• WDM Report - This retrieves a list of all immediate OSC neighbors to the local network element (node or NE).

• OSI NE Area - Specifies the OSI Network Element Area.

IP route

This option allows the operator to enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table, by CP. If the AID specifies a STSn then the NEXTHOP parameter should not be specified. If the AID specifies the LAN, then the NEXTHOP parameter must be specified.

Select Xcom -> Network Domain -> IP Route option as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Network domain page - IP Route

The IP Routing Configuration tab displays the following:• AID - Specifies the Access Identifier for the IP route• Destination Address - Specifies the destination IP address for the IP route• IP Mask - Specifies the subnet mask for the IP route• Next Hop - Specifies the IP address of the next hop• DCCCHNL - Specifies the DDC channel information• METRIC - Specifies the metric value for the IP route• METRICTYPE - Specifies the metric type for the IP route• STATUS - Specifies the IP route status

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-49

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• ADVERTISE - Specifies whether the IP route is leaked into IP routing protocols ( Integrated IS-IS). The values are: N (route is only known on the local NE) or Y (route is leaked into integrated IS-IS)

Click Create hyperlink to configure a new IP Route. See “Create IP route” (p. 5-84).

Gateway Map Table

It allows the operator to manage a static entry from the TL1 Gateway mapping table. The TL1 Gateway mapping table associates Target Identifiers (TIDs) with IP address / raw terminal port pairs.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Xcom -> Network Domain -> Gateway Map Table option the following page appears:

Figure 3-43 Network Domain page - Gateway Map Table

The page has the Create hyperlink which allows to start the creation procedure as described in “Create Gateway Map Table” (p. 5-86).

NSAP report

This option instructs the NE to provide routing database information that is supported by Layer 3 (network layer) of the OSI Data Communication Network (DCN).

Select Xcom -> Network Domain -> NSAP Report option as shown in Figure 3-44.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-44 Network domain page - NSAP Report

The NETWORK SERVICES ACCESS POINT tab displays the NETWORK SERVICES ACCESS POINT panel that contains the following parameters:• Lookup Type - Specifies the type of lookup function that will be performed to retrieve

neighboring NEs. The values are:– DRCT - Retrieves the NSAPs and the TIDs of all the directly reachable (1 hop

away) Level 1 and Level 2 Intermediate Systems (ISs), to which an adjacency is formed

– L1ROU - Retrieves the NSAPs of all the reachable Level 1 ISs within all the areas, including NEs

– L1ROUTID - Retrieves the NSAPs and the TIDs of all the reachable Level 1 ISs within all the areas, including NEs

– L2ROU - Retrieves the area addresses of all the reachable Level 2 ISs, including NEs

The Search hyperlink allows to start the NSAP search procedure.

WDM Report

This option retrieves a list of all immediate OSC neighbors to the local network element (node or NE). From the application menu bar, select the Xcom -> Network Domain -> WDM Report.

OSI NE area

Select Xcom -> Network Domain -> OSI NE Area option as shown in Figure 3-45.

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-51

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-45 OSI NE area

The OSI tab displays the OSI AREA panel that contains the following parameters:• OSI AREA. - To determine an access Identifier for an OSI area.• Level 3 Initial Domain Part of the NSAP - Assigns the initial domain part of the

manual area address (8 hexadecimal characters).• Level 3 Domain Format Identifier of the NSAP - Assigns the domain format

identifier field of the manual area address (2 hexadecimal characters).• Level 3 Organization - Assigns the organization field of the manual area address (8

hexadecimal characters).• Level 3 Reserved - Assigns the reserved field of the manual area address (4

hexadecimal characters).• Level 3 Routing - Assigns the routing domain and routing area within the routing

domain of the manual area address (8 hexadecimal characters).• Level 3 System Identifier - This is the system identifier assigned to the card (12

hexadecimal characters).

The Save hyperlink saves the changes and returns back to the previous page.

TARP Mng

This menu allows the user to manage the TL1 Address resolution Protocol (TARP) parameters.

This menu option contains the following parameters:• TARP Report - It allows the user to retrieve the TL1 Address resolution Protocol

(TARP) parameters.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• TARP Cache - It allows the user to retrieve all of the current TARP Data Cache entries.

• TARP LDB - It retrieves the TARP Loop Detection Buffer (LDB). The TARP LDB is a circular first in first out buffer. Each entry in the TARP LDB contains a sequence number and the protocol address of the originator.

TARP Report

This option allows the user to retrieve the TL1 Address resolution Protocol (TARP) parameters.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Xcom -> TARP Mng -> TARP Report option the following page will appears.

Figure 3-46 TARP Management page - TARP Report

The TL1 Address Resolution Protocol Parameters (TARP) panel contains:• Type 1 Timer - This field specifies the wait time (in seconds) for a response to a

TARP Type 1 request PDU (in the 0 to 3600 range).• Type 2 Timer - This field specifies the wait time (in seconds) for a response to a

TARP Type 2 request PDU (in the 0 to 3600 range).• Type 3 Timer - This field specifies the wait time (in seconds) for a response to a

TARP Type 3 request PDU (in the 0 to 3600 range).• Type 4 Timer - This field is the timer (in seconds) that starts when timer T2 expires.

This timer is used during the Error Recovery procedure. (in the 0 to 3600 range).• Loop Detection Buffer Entry Timer - This field is a timer (in seconds) used to

manage Loop Detection Buffer (LDB) entries having a TARP sequence number equal to 0 (i. e., when the Error Recovery procedure is started or the NE is reset) (in the 60 to 600 range).

Xcom menuMenu bar


3-53

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Loop Detection Buffer Flush Timer - This field is the wait time (in minutes) for all the LDB entries to be flushed (in the 0 to 1440 range).

• TARP Lifetime - The field specifies the TARP time-to-live (in number of hops) (in the 0 to 65535 range).

• TARP Origination flag - This field is a flag that enables / disables TARP PDU origination. N (TARP PDU origination is enabled) or Y (TARP PDU origination is disabled).

• TARP Sequence Number - This field is the sequence number currently in use by TARP processor (in the 0 to 65535 range).

• TARP Data Cache flag - This field is a flag that enables / disables TARP Data Cache (TDC) processing. N (TDC processing is enabled) or Y (TDC processing is disabled).

TARP Cache

This option allows the user to retrieve all of the current TARP Data Cache entries.

TL1 uses the target identifier (TID) to define the destination of a command, but the connection less network protocol (CLNP) uses the NSAP address to define the destination of a TL1 message. In order to send a TL1 message in a network using CLNP at layer 3, the TID must be converted into the appropriate NSAP address.

The TID addresses are mapped to NSAP addresses through automatic network provisioning (TARP feature). For TID routing translation, TIDs and NSAPs are associated in pairs and are cached in the TARP CACHE. The TARP CACHE is essentially the TID-NSAP look-up table. The TARP cache gets repopulated automatically as a result of TARP protocol's functionalities.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Xcom -> TARP Mng -> TARP Cache option the following page appears.

Figure 3-47 TARP Management page - TARP Cache

TARP LDB

It retrieves the TARP Loop Detection Buffer (LDB). The TARP LDB is a circular first in first out buffer. Each entry in the TARP LDB contains a sequence number and the protocol address of the originator.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Xcom -> TARP Mng -> TARP LDB option the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Xcom menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-48 TARP Management page - TARP LDB

Alarms menuMenu bar


3-55

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms menu

Purpose

The alarms menu allows the operator to manage entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile). An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or settable by the operator. The menu options are:• TCA Profile - Allows to configure and display of the active threshold crossing alarm

profile (TCA = Threshold Crossing Alarm).• ASAP Mng - Allows to configure and display the ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment

Profile).• ALM CUTOFF - Allows to silence the office audible alarm indications.• ALM Resynch. - Allows to update the alarm database to the current alarm situation.

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) profile

Select Alarms -> TCA Profile option as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Alarms page - TCA profile

The TCA Profile tab contains the Filter panel that contains the following parameters:• Profile Type - the associated combo-box lists all the TCA profile access Identifier.

The values are:– blank = none– ALL = all profiles– GBE10 = 10 Gigabit Ethernet profiles– GBE= Gigabit Ethernet profiles– GFC10 = 10 Generic Flow Control profiles– OCn = OCn (where n = 3, 12, 48 or 192) profiles– OCHPORT = Optical Channel port profiles

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– ODU2 = ODU2 port profiles– OSCPORT = Optical Supervisory Channel port profiles– OTSPORT = Optical Transmission Section port profiles– OTU2 = OTU2 port profiles– STSn = STSn (where n = 1, 3c, 12c, 48c or 192c) profiles

• TCA-AID - it has three associated combo-boxes: – The first combo-box lists all the TCA profile access Identifier with the THP prefix

followed by the Profile Type abbreviation previously described, e.g. THPOCHPORT.

– The second and third combo-boxes allow to set a number for the profile access Identifier. The range is from 0 to 256, e.g. THPOCHPORT-0-1.

• User Label - This is an entry field which allows to digit the user label of the profile access Identifier. This is the TCA-AID with only one of the profile number and precedes by the LBL description, e.g. LBLTHPOCHPORT-0.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:

The Cancel allows to close the page and return back to the previous page.

The Search allows to start the search procedure.

The TCA Profile page contains the Create hyperlink that allows to create a new TCA Profile as described in “Create TCA profile” (p. 5-88).

ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile) management

Select Alarms -> ASAP Mng option as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Alarms page - ASAPs management

The ASAP Mng tab displays the ASAP FILTER panel that contains the following parameters:• ASAP AID - The associated combo-box lists all the available ID services as the

tributary signal. The default values are:– ALL = all alarms

Alarms menuMenu bar


3-57

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– ASAPEQPT = equipment alarms– ASAPBITS = synchronism alarms– ASAPSECU = administration security alarms– ASAPOCn = OCn (where n = 3, 12, 48 or 192) alarms– ASAPSTSn = STSn (where n = 1, 3c, 12c, 48c or 192c) alarms– ASAPGBE = Gigabit Ethernet alarms– ASAP10GBE = 10 Gigabit Ethernet alarms– ASAP10GFC = 10 Generic Flow Control alarms– ASAPVCG = Virtual Concatenation Group alarms– ASAPODU2 = ODU2 port alarms– ASAPOTU2 = OTU2 port alarms– ASAPOCHPORT = Optical Channel port alarms– ASAPOTSPORT = Optical Transmission Section port alarms

• User Label - The entry box shows a mnemonic string to address the ASAP. The xxxxxxx-0 and -1 are factory defined, while xxxxxx-2 to -n can be set by the user. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator.

The Search hyperlink allows to start the search procedure.

The Create allows to configure a new ASAP. See “Create ASAP” (p. 5-77)

ALM cutoff

Select Alarms -> ALM CUTOFF option as shown in Figure 3-51.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarms menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-51 Alarm cutoff

Click on SEND functional button a command cuts off the office audible alarm indications without changing the local alarm reporting and the following indication appears under the table.

The currently active audible alarm indications will be silenced. The visual alarm indications are not affected. Future alarm reporting is not be affected and new audible alarm indications will be provided for any new alarms.

The ACO LED turns on and a new alarm arrives, it is presented to the audible closures and the ACO LED switches off. Alarms silenced are not presented to the Audible closures even if they are still present (only new alarms).

ALM resynch.

Select Alarms -> ALM Resynch. option as shown in Figure 3-52.

Alarms menuMenu bar


3-59

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-52 Alarm resynchronization

Click on Resynchronize functional button a command refresh the alarms and the relevant information is referred.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Protection menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Protection menu

Purpose

This menu allows the operator to manage the available protection systems. The menu options are:• EQPS - Allows to manage the 1:1 Equipment Protection Switching for equipment

unit.• APS - Allows to manage the Automatic Protection Switching setting the relevant

configuration.• UPSR - Allows to manage the Unidirectional Path Switched Ring traffic protection.• BLSR - Allows to manage the Bidirectional Line Switched Ring traffic protection.

EQPS

Select Protection -> Equipment Protection (EQuipment Protection Switching) as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 EQPS tab

The EQPS tab displays one table for each 1:1 protection that are in the node. Each table contains the following parameters:• Protection Unit - Specifies the Primary and Spare units that are 1:1 protected• Access Identifier - Specifies the type of units that is 1:1 protected. Each one is

identified by <unit acronym> - <rack> - <shelf> - <slot> where is housed (e.g., MT320-1-1-10)

• Primary State - Specifies the primary state to which the equipment is set. The values are:– IS In Service - The module is providing service– OOS-AU - Out of Service, Autonomous - The module is out of service due to an

autonomous event– OOS-MA - Out of Service, Management - The module is out of service due to

management action– OOS-AUMA - Out of Service, Autonomous and Management - The module is out

of service both due to an autonomous event and management action



3-61

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Secondary State - Specifies the secondary state to which the equipment is set. The values are:– AINS Autonomous in service - The module is in the AINS state and changes to in

service when plugged in.– FLT Fault - The module has a Hardware Failure condition.– MEA Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes - An incompatible module is

physically present in a provisioned slot.– PSI Protection Switching Inhibited, by operator command– SGEO Supporting Entity Outage - Reported for an XFP, SFP or PIM module if the

supporting IO card is in a OOS primary state. SGEO Supporting Entity Outage.– SDEE Supported Entities Existing - Reported for IOC, PIM, SFP and XFP

modules that directly supports provisioned.– Facilities. Reported for all the IOCs modules that don't support directly any

Facilities but that hosts provisioned Equipment entities that support directly provisioned Facilities.

– STBYC Standby-Cold - The module is to back up another module, but is not synchronized with the backed-up module. A module with a cold standby status will not be immediately able to take over the role of the backed-up module, and will require some initialization activity.

– STBYH Standby-Hot - The module is to back-up another entity and is normally synchronized with the backed-up module. When In-Service, a module with a hot standby status will be immediately able to take over the role of the backed-up module without the need for initialization activity. Note that STBYH state is maintained even when the entity is OOS. Mutually exclusive with WRK and STBYC.

– SWDL Software Download - The module is out of service because it is in the process of acquiring, loading, and/or initializing its software.

– UAS Unassigned - No equipment is provisioned in the addressed position.– UEQ Unequipped - There is no module in the addressed position.

• Protection Status - Specifies the status of the unit (“Working”, “StandbyHot” or “--”).

Click on one of the displayed item in the Access Identifier column as shown in Figure 3-54.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-54 EQPS selection page

The Equipment Protection Switch tab displays the Equipment Protection Switch panel that contains the following parameters:

– Access Identifier - Specifies in the <unit acronym> - <rack> - <shelf> - <slot> format, where the selected unit is housed

– Primary/Secondary State - Specifies the state of the selected unit– Command Mode - Combo-box allows to change the status of the unit. The values

are NORM (normal) or FRCD (forced)

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel - This is used to delete the operation in the page and returns to the previous

page.– Manual Switch - This is used to manually switch the real status shown in the

associated table.– Inhibit Switch - This is used to avoid the automatic switch of the involved unit.

The table contains the following columns:– Slot - Specifies the slots where the protected and protecting units are housed– Access Identifier - Specifies in the <unit acronym> - <rack> - <shelf> - <slot>

format, where it is housed– Role - Specifies the real role of the unit. The values are Protecting or Working.

This column is related to the next column– Equipment Protection Status - Specifies the real status of the unit. The values are

Standby or Active. This column is related to the previous column

APS

The APS option allows to create a Protecting or West OCn (OC3, OC12 and OC48) facility with a Protected or East facility. The Linear 1+1 APS facility protection groups can be provisioned on a port-pair basis. For linear 1+1 APS, the OC-n ports must be



3-63

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

configured on an adjacent pair of cards, with the Protected/West port in the lower numbered slot and Protecting/East port in the next higher numbered slot. For optical modules that support multiple ports, the port numbers specified must be same for both the working and the protection entities.

Selecting the Protection -> APS (Automatic Protection System) menu path, the following page will appear:

Figure 3-55 Protection Page -> APS

The APS page displays the Filter by panel that contains the following parameter:– Signal - The values are:

• ALL• OC3• OC12• OC48• OC192

The Search is used to start the search activity.

The Create link is used to configure a new APS. See “Create APS” (p. 5-91)

UPSR

This procedure allows the operator to create an FFP that associates a Protecting or East OC-192 facility with a Protected or West facility. When multiple facilities are supported by module, grouping facility number on EAST and the facility number on the WEST module must be same. i.e., port 1 OCn facility on EAST must be paired with port 1 WEST. Similarly port 2 on EAST must be paired with port 2 on WEST facility to form a BLSR2 group.

The OC-n ports must be configured on adjacent pair of cards with the Protected/West port in the lower-numbered slot and Protecting/East port in the next higher slot. For optical modules that support multiple ports, the port numbers specified must be same on both the working and the protection entities.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The STS1|/STSxC facilities within the OC-n that is designated to be the Protected/WEST facility are designated as the Preferred facilities. The STS1/STSxC facilities within the OC-n that is designated to be the Protecting/EAST facility are designated as the alternate STS1/STSxC facilities.

Selecting the Protection -> UPSR (Unidirectional Path Switched Ring) menu path, the following page appears:

Figure 3-56 Protection Page -> UPSR

The UPSR page displays the Filter by panel that contains the following parameter:– Signal - The values are:

• ALL• OC3• OC12• OC48• OC192

The Search hyperlink is used to perform a search of the existing UPSR protection.

The Create link is used to configure a new UPSR. See “Create UPSR” (p. 5-93)

BLSR

This option allows to create (associate) a Protecting or West OCn (OC3, OC12, OC48 and OC192) facility with a Protected or East facility.

The UPSR (Bidirectional Line Switched Ring) facility protection groups can be provisioned on a port-pair basis. For UPSR, the STS1/STSxC facilities within the OCn that is designated to be the Protected/WEST facility are designated as the Preferred facilities. The STS1/STSxC facilities within the OCn that is designated to be the Protecting/EAST facility are designated as the alternate STS1/STSxC facilities.

Selecting the Protection -> BLSR (Bidirectional Line Switched Ring) menu path, the following page will appear:



3-65

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-57 Protection Page -> BLSR

The BLSR page displays the Filter by panel that contains the following parameter:– Signal - The values are:

• ALL• OC3• OC12• OC48• OC192

The Search hyperlink is used to perform a search of the existing BLSR protection.

The Create link is used to configure a new BLSR. See “Create BLSR” (p. 5-94)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronization menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Synchronization menu

Purpose

This menu allows the operator to manage the ports dedicated to BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock distribution purposes. A BITS output reference is a DS1 signal. The menu options are:• BITS - Allows to modify the characteristics (BITS-0 as Primary and BITS-1 as

Secondary) and the outgoing port of reference clock. • Synchronization - Allows to modify the parameters of the synchronization system.

BITS

This menu option contains three sub-menu options:• Modify BITS-0 - Allows to edit bit 0 related to a given shelf.• Modify BITS-1 - Allows to search and edit bit 1 related to a given shelf.• Modify BITS-OUT - Allows to search and edit bit out related to a given shelf.

Modify BITS-0 and BITS-1

Select Synchronization -> Bits -> Modify BITS-0 or Synchronization -> Bits -> Modify BITS-1 as shown in Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-58 Modify BITS-0 or BITS-1 panel

The “Modify BITS-0” and “Modify BITS-1” are the same panel with the two different Access Identifier values. The panel contains the following fields:• Access identifier: - Specifies the access identifier for the selected BITS



3-67

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• DS1 Line Code - Allows to select the type of DS1 line code for an electrical DS1 or external timing reference source. The values are Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) and Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (B8ZS).

• DS1 Format - Allows to select the DS1 signal format for this port in incoming and outgoing direction. The values are Extended Super Frame (ESF), Extended Super Frame STU (ESF STU) and Super Frame (SF). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (SF).

• Current Primary State - Specifies the retrieved primary state. The values are: In Service - Normal (ISNR), Out Of Service - Autonomous (OOS-AU) and Out Of Service - Management (OOS-MA),

• Primary State - Specifies the primary state to set. The values are In Service (IS) and Out Of Service (OOS). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (IS).

• Command Mode - Specifies the command mode of "Remove" action. The values are Forced (FRCD) and Normal (NORM). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (NORM).

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save hyperlink is used to send the related command to the Network Element.

Automatically is loaded the “Modify BITS-0” or “Modify BITS-1” page to show update data.

– Remove hyperlink is used to send the related command to the Network Element. Automatically is loaded the "Modify BITS-0" or "Modify BITS-1" page to show update data.

– Restore hyperlink is used to send the related command to the Network Element. Automatically is loaded the "Modify BITS-0" or "Modify BITS-1" page to show update data.

A further panel ALARM allows to display the alarms relevant to the BITS. Click VIEW hyperlink the following table appears as shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59 Alarm view for synchronization

The table contains the following columns:• Raise/Clear Time - Identifies the time when the event is occurred and/or cleared.• AID Access Identifier - Specifies the facility in the <acronym> format.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• NTFCNCDE Notification Code - Identifies the type of alarm generated by the system upon occurrence of the event identified by the CONDTYPE. The values are: – CR Critical alarm– MJ Major alarm– MN Minor alarm

• SRVEFF Service Effect - Identifies the effect on service caused by the event. The values are: – NSA Non service-affecting– SA Service-affecting

• CONDTYPE Condition Type - Specifies the condition type retrieved. The values are: – AIS Alarm Indication Signal– LOF Loss of Frame– LOS Loss of Signal– MAN Manual (Management) Removal

• LOCN Location - Identifies the location where the condition type is monitored. The values are: – NEND Near End– FEND Far End

• AIDTYPE - Identifies the type of AID for the notification being retrieved.

Modify BITS-OUT

Select Synchronization -> Bits -> Modify BITS-OUT menu path as shown in Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60 Modify BITS outgoing panel

The Modify BITS OUT panel contains the following fields:• Transmitted ESF - Allows to select the type of the transmitted ESF data-link of the

DS1 signal. The values are Don't Use Actual and Actual. The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (Actual).



3-69

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Current LBO0 - Specifies the length of DS1 cable from the outgoing BITS port to BITS reference point. The values are: 0 dB compensation, 0-110[feet] (0-33[m]), 110-220[feet] (33-66[m]), 220-330[feet] (66-99[m]), 330-440[feet] (99-133[m]), 440-550[feet] (133-166[m]) and 550-660[feet] (167-200[m]).

• LBO0 - Allows to select the length of DS1 cable from the outgoing BITS port to BITS reference point. The values are: 0 dB compensation, 0-110[feet] (0-33[m]), 110-220[feet] (33-66[m]), 220-330[feet] (66-99[m]), 330-440[feet] (99-133[m]), 440-550[feet] (133-166[m]) and 550-660[feet] (167-200[m]). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (0-110[feet] (0-33[m])).

• Current LBO1 - Specifies the length of DS1 cable from the outgoing BITS port to BITS reference point. The values are: 0 dB compensation, 0-110[feet] (0-33[m]), 110-220[feet] (33-66[m]), 220-330[feet] (66-99[m]), 330-440[feet] (99-133[m]), 440-550[feet] (133-166[m]) and 550-660[feet] (167-200[m]). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (Actual).

• LBO1 - allows to select the length of DS1 cable from the outgoing BITS port to BITS reference point. The values are: 0 dB compensation, 0-110[feet] (0-33[m]), 110-220[feet] (33-66[m]), 220-330[feet] (66-99[m]), 330-440[feet] (99-133[m]), 440-550[feet] (133-166[m]) and 550-660[feet] (167-200[m]). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (0-110[feet] (0-33[m])).

The panel has the Save hyperlink that is used to send the related command to the Network Element. Automatically is loaded the Modify BITS OUT page to show update data.

Synchronization

This menu option contains the following four sub-menus:• Modify Synch. - Opens the "Modify Synchronization" page• Modify Out Synch. - Opens the "Modify Synchronization Outgoing" page• Modify Switch Synch. - Opens the Modify "Synchronization Switch" page

Modify Synch.

Selecting the Synchronization -> Synchronization -> Modify Synch. menu path, the following page will appear:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-61 Synchronization Page - Modify Synch.

The Modify Synch. page contains an editable panel and two tables. The Modify Clock References panel contains the following fields:• Current Primary Reference - Specifies a BITS or an optical carrier assigned as

Primary Clock Reference for the system.• Primary Reference - Allows to assign BITS (BITS-0 or BITS-1) or an optical carrier

(OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 or OC-192) as Primary Clock Reference for the system. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection as described in Select “Reference clock” on page 381. The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (NA).

• Current Secondary Reference - Specifies a BITS or an optical carrier assigned as Secondary Clock Reference for the system.

• Secondary Reference - Allows to assign BITS (BITS-0 or BITS-1) or an optical carrier (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 nor OC-192) as Secondary Clock Reference for the system. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection. The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (NA).

• Sync Messaging - Allows to select if CRG is using sync messaging (Qualities) to drive synchronization. The values are: Yes (Y) or No (N). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (N not enabled).



3-71

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Revertive - Allows to select the switching between references Revertive or NonRevertive. Allowed values are: Yes (Y) or No (N). The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (N not enabled). The panel has the Save hyperlink that is used to send the related command to the Network Element. Automatically the Clock Reference page is loaded to show update data.

The columns of the Clock References table show information on timing entities. The columns of the table are:• Access identifier- Specifies an "NESYNC" access identifier.• Primary Reference- Specifies the status of the port assigned to the Primary Clock

Timing Reference. The values can be as following: – PRS (Stratum 1 traceable)– STU (Synchronized - traceability unknown)– ST2 (Stratum 2 traceable) – TNC (Transit node clock traceable)– ST3E (Stratum 3E traceable) – ST3 (Stratum 3 traceable)– SMC (SONET minimum clock traceable)– ST4 (Stratum 4 traceable) or DUS (Do not use for synchronization)– FAILURE (Reference clock in failed state)– NA (Reference clock not present / not assigned)

• Secondary Reference- Specifies the status of the port assigned to the Secondary Clock Timing Reference. The values are the same of the Primary one.

• Status- Specifies the status of the port assigned to the Primary Clock Timing Reference. The values can be: OK (Timing reference is working without failures) or MAN (Timing reference is logically removed) or LOS (Timing reference has a LOSS of signal failure) or LOF (Timing reference has a LOSS of frame failure) or AIS (Timing reference has a AIS failure) or SLTMSIG (Timing reference where external reference frequency has moved off the accuracy limits) or NA (No timing reference assigned)

• Sync Messaging- Specifies if CRG is using sync messaging (Qualities) to drive synchronization. The values can be: No (Sync Messaging is disabled. CRG reference selection is done by priorities) or Yes (Sync Messaging is enabled. CRG reference selection is done by SSM quality levels.

• Revertive- Specifies if switching between references is Revertive or NonRevertive. The values can be: No (Switching is NonRevertive) or Yes (Switching is Revertive).

Modify Out Synch.

Selecting the Synchronization -> Synchronization -> Modify Synch. menu path, the following page will appear:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-62 Synchronization - Modify Out Synch.

The Synchronization Outgoing tab displays the Modify Synchronization Outgoing panel that contains the following parameters:• Access identifier - Specifies the CRG Synchronization Information. NESYNC means

Clock Reference Generator Address.• Current Primary Reference - Specifies a BITS or an optical carrier assigned as

Primary Clock Reference for the system. • Primary Out Clock Reference - Allows to assign BITS (BITS-0 or BITS-1) or an

optical carrier (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 nor OC-192) as Primary Clock Reference for the system. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection. The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (NA).

• Current Secondary Reference - Specifies a BITS or an optical carrier assigned as Secondary Clock Reference for the system.

• Secondary Out Clock Reference - allows to assign BITS (BITS-0 or BITS-1) or an optical carrier (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 nor OC-192) as Secondary Clock Reference for the system. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection. The Default hyperlink allows to recover the previously existing value or the factory default (NA).

The Save hyperlink is used to send the related command to the Network Element. Automatically the "Modify Synchronization Outgoing" page is loaded to show update data.

Modify Switch Synch.

Selecting the Synchronization -> Synchronization -> Modify Switch Synch. menu path, the following page appears:



3-73

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-63 Synchronization Page- Modify Switch Synch.

The Modify Synchronization Switch panel contains the following fields:• Switch To Reference - Allows to assign the clock reference source that is to be

selected as the system clock synchronization source. The values are "Internal Clock", "Primary Clock Reference" and "Secondary Clock Reference".

• Command Mode - Allows to assign the command mode of "Operate" action. The values are "Forced" and "Normal". The Default hyperlink near the combo-box allows to apply the default value.

The panel has below mentioned hyperlinks:– Operate - To operate switching outgoing synchronization resources related to a

given shelf. – Release - This is used to send the related command to the Network Element.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System management menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System management menu

Purpose

The System Management menu provides options for users and administrators to manage the system. This menu contains following choices:• Initialize and Upgrade• DB Management• Network Time Protocol

Initialize and upgrade

This menu allows the user to manage the upgrading of the system. This menu contains the following two choices:• Initialize System - For a general upgrading of the software.

– With New Release – With Old Release

• In-Service Upgrade - For a software refresh.

Initialize system with new release

This option starts the background activity on the NE to perform the actual switch over from the current release to the new release. This option returns a completion message to the user when the background activity is successfully started.

A copy of the primary database is generated during its execution and used for database conversion in the upgrade processing. This backup is also used to revert to the old release database when the Initialize System With Old Release option is issued after the system is upgraded to the new release.

During the switch over process the system performs an FLC switch. At this point all TL1 sessions are terminated.

During the switch over process the system performs POWER-ON reset on the matrix modules and download new FPGA images on IO cards and matrix cards if required.

If the activation of the new release fails, the system reverts to the old release and old database.

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> Initialize System -> With New Release as shown in Figure 3-64.



3-75

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-64 System management - Initialize system - with new release

The Initialize System tab displays the Initialize System panel that shows the Apply hyperlink that is used to start the new release procedure.

The Apply hyperlink selection causes the ZIC main window closure and a secondary window is displayed to send the command and to notify the command completion status. If the command is successfully completed, the secondary window starts capturing initialization system events and monitoring the web server availabilty after FLC switch. If the command is denied the user has to login to display the ZIC main window.

Initialize system with old release

This option starts the background activity on the NE to switch back from the current release and database to previous release and database. The previous release and database are those which were active on the NE before the last Initialize System With New Release option was successfully completed.

This option returns a completion message to the user when the background activity has been successfully started.

During the switch back process the system will perform POWER-ON reset on the matrix modules and download previous release software FPGA images on IO cards and matrix cards if required. This may cause traffic interruption.

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> Initialize System -> With Old Release menu path as shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65 System Management - Initialize system with old release

The panel has the Apply hyperlink that is used to start the old release procedure. The Apply hyperlink selection causes the ZIC main window closure and a secondary window is displayed to send the command and to notify the command completion status. If the

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

command is successfully completed, the secondary window starts capturing initialization system events and monitoring the web server availabilty after FLC switch. If the command is denied the user has to login to display the ZIC main window.

In-Service upgrade

This menu allows to manage the in-service upgrading. This menu option contains the following four sub -menus:• Upgrade Status - Retrieves the status of the ongoing upgrade procedure.• Start Upgrade - Prepares the system for activation of the new release.• Stop Upgrade - It halts/stops the in-service upgrade procedure and reverts the system

to the state before the Start Upgrade option was issued.• Remove Old Upgrade - This makes the current release software the permanent active

software.

In-Service upgrade and upgrade status

This option retrieves the status of the ongoing upgrade procedure.

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> In-Service Upgrade -> Upgrade Status menu as shown in Figure 3-66.

Figure 3-66 System management - In-service upgrade status

The In-Service Upgrade Status tab displays status of the in-service upgrade. The status are:• Download In Progress (DLIP) - Indicates that a COPY-RFILE command for

software package transfer is ongoing.• Initialize New Completed (INITNC) - Indicates the INIT-SYS-NEW system

initialization process completed successfully and the system is restarted on the new release.

• Initialize New In Progress (INITNIP) - Indicates the INIT-SYS-NEW system initialization process is in progress.

• Initialize Old Completed (INITOC) - Indicates the INIT-SYS-OLD system initialization process completed successfully and the system is restarted on the previous release.

• Initialize Old In Progress (INITOIP) - Indicates the INIT-SYS-OLD system initialization process is in progress.



3-77

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• No Status In Progress (NOSTAIP) - Indicates that no generic in-service upgrade procedure is in progress or has been attempted.

• Removal In Progress (RMVIP) - Indicates the removal of the previous release is in progress.

• Status Completed (STAC) - Indicates that the STA-ISU command completed successfully and is awaiting the issuance of the INIT-SYS-NEW command.

• Status In Progress (STAIP) - Indicates that an in-service upgrade procedure is in progress.

• Stop Completed (STPC) - Indicates that the STP-ISU command completed successfully.

In-service upgrade and start upgrade

The system performs a series of consistency checks on the actual configuration to make sure that the system is in a state that can successfully be upgraded to the new release.

During command execution, the system remains in-service and continues to provide protection switching and alarm reporting functionality on the current release. To assure that the consistency checks are done on a consistent NE database, TL1 commands that would alter the NE configuration are rejected during the ongoing consistency checks.

The performed consistency checks shall assure that the upgrade from the current (old) release to the specified new release can be done successfully. The performed checks include:• Verification that a new release software has been downloaded to the NE.• Verification that the downloaded software matches the specified new release build

identifier.• Verification of the NE configuration of the current release is fully supported by the

new release (anticipating any known incompatibilities between old and new release).

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> In-Service Upgrade -> Start Upgrade as shown in Figure 3-67.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-67 System Management - In-Service Upgrade - Start In-Service Upgrade

The In-Service Upgrade tab displays the Start In-Service Upgrade panel that shows the status of the in-service upgrade. The status are the same described in In-service upgrade and start upgrade, it presents the Start In-Service Upgrade field.

The panel has the Apply hyperlink that is used to start the in-service upgrade process.

In-service upgrade and stop upgrade

This option halts/stops the in-service upgrade procedure and reverts the system to the state before the Start Upgrade command was issued. The downloaded new release software is removed from the NE.

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> In-Service Upgrade -> Stop Upgrade as shown in Figure 3-68.

Figure 3-68 System management - In-service upgrade - Stop In-Service Upgrade

The panel shows the status of the in-service upgrade. The possible status are the same described in In-service upgrade and start upgrade, but it presents the Stop In-Service Upgrade? field.

The panel has the Apply hyperlink that is used to stop the in-service upgrade process.

In-service upgrade and remove old upgrade

This option makes the current release software the permanent active software. It effectively prevents reversion to a previous release once it is determined by the operator that the capability is no longer required.



3-79

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

After successful completion of this command, all software/database indicators are set to indicate that the current release is now the permanently active one. The system remains in service on the currently active release and all system functionality remains operational.

Select System Management -> Initialize and Upgrade -> In-Service Upgrade -> Remove Old Upgrade as shown in Figure 3-69.

Figure 3-69 System management - In-service upgrade - Remove In-Service upgrade

The panel shows the status of the in-service upgrade. The possible status are the same described in In-service upgrade and start upgrade, but it presents the Remove In-Service Upgrade field.

The panel has the Apply hyperlink that is used to remove the old upgrade process.

DB management

An NE maintains all its configuration in a volatile memory database. Non-volatile disk backup databases are maintained implicitly by the NE, and explicitly by operator commands. The NE is able to restore its memory database from the contents of a disk backup database at restart time or triggered by an operator command.

The NE provides mechanisms to transfer a locally stored disk database backup to an RFS and vice versa.

The NE allows operator to reset its memory and primary backup database to a factory installed default configuration.

The volatile memory database is maintained by the NE and reflects the NE configuration, its alarm states and conditions. Two non-volatile disk database types exist for the NE: The primary backup database and the secondary backup data base.

The primary backup database is maintained implicitly by the NE during its normal operation. At any time, it reflects the state of the NE's volatile memory database. Updating the primary backup database occurs online without interrupting the NE's normal service operation.

The primary backup database can be copied to the secondary backup database by an operator command.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The secondary backup database can be copied to the primary backup database. After an FLC restart (or FLC switch) the memory database will be reloaded from the restored disk database.

The secondary backup database can be copied to/from a Remote File Server (RFS) by operator commands (remote backup and remote restore).

The NE supports autonomous reporting of memory database changes, in particular, changes to provisioning state of the equipment and the facilities.

The NE meets the DB requirements from GR-472-CORE and other applicable standards. This menu option contains the following sub-options:• DataBase - For Database management.• Remote File - For Database from Remote File Server management.• Network Element - For retrieving general system level configuration information.• Set Site Identifier - For setting the Site Identifier (SID) code that is compared to any

Target Identifier (TID) value.

Database

This menu option contains the following options:• Perform DB Backup - It backs up the primary backup data base to the secondary

backup data base.• Cancel DB Backup - It cancels a database backup currently in progress.• Restore DB - It copies the backup database stored on secondary backup database to

the primary backup database and resets the system to activate the new database• DB Information - It reads the database label of the selected backup database stored

on the NE

Perform DB backup

This option backs up the whole NE provisioning and configuration database, excluding Performance Monitoring History Data, current alarm situation, and event log data; in addition to the database, also writes the system type, the software release identifier, the site identifier, the backup date and time stamp to the secondary backup database.

The system also writes a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to the secondary backup database.

This option returns COMLPD if the process of backup creation has been started on the NE. The actual completion of the backup process (either successful, or being cancelled, or with an error) is notified to the operator.

If the creation failed, the system sets the DBF condition. A DBF condition is cleared by successfully completing a subsequent action or Restore DB option. No DBF condition is raised if the backup creation was cancelled by the operator.



3-81

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Any database backup currently in-progress can be aborted (canceled) by the Cancel DB Backup option. If an in-progress database backup is canceled, an unsuccessful response message is generated for this option and the system may mark through the database header the backed-up data on the secondary backup database as "invalid" (depending on the timing of the cancellation) so that it cannot be inadvertently used for a subsequent database restoration or remote database backup.

Alarms are not part of the backup, neither alarms active when the backup was started, nor alarms being raised during the backup is created. Alarms should be cleared before performing database backups.

Note: When a database backup is restored, the NE is will perform an alarm resynchronization to update its alarm database to the current alarm situation.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Data Base -> Perform DB Backup as shown:

Figure 3-70 System Management Page - Perform DB backup

Clicking on Yes, the following window appears, which displays the successful completion of sent command.

Click on OK, to return to the main page. The final result SUCCESS, FAILURE or CANCEL of database backup operation is notified by an event in a secondary window.

Cancel DB backup

This option cancels (aborts) a database backup currently in progress.

If an in-progress database backup is canceled, a message indicates the cancellation is generated for this action and the system may mark via the database header the backed-up data on the secondary backup database as "invalid" (depending on the timing of the cancellation) so that it cannot be inadvertently used for a subsequent database restoration or remote database backup.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Data Base -> Cancel DB Backup as shown in Figure 3-71.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-71 System management - perform DB backup

Clicking on Yes, the following window appears.

Click OK, to return to the main page.

Restore DB

This option copies the backup database stored on secondary backup database to the primary backup database and resets the system to activate the new database.

When this option is executed, provisioning and database effects of TL1 commands issued since the time the backup was made, until the completion of a database restoration, are lost.

The database restoration operation verifies the System Type, software release identifier, the date and time of the backup creation, and Site ID (SID) of the system against the corresponding data stored along with the secondary backup database. A database restoration with a System Type mismatch cannot be performed. A database restoration with a software release identifier or SID mismatch cannot be performed unless the command mode parameter is set to FRCD. A database restoration with backup creation date and time different from the most recent backup created on the system cannot be performed unless the command mode parameter is set to FRCD.

The database restoration operation also verifies the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) calculated for the database from the secondary backup database against the CRC stored for the database. A database restoration with a CRC mismatch cannot be performed.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Data Base -> Restore DB as shown in Figure 3-72.



3-83

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-72 System management - restore DB

The Database panel displays the Restore Database panel that contains the following:• Command Mode - Allows to assign the command mode of the action. The values are:

– Forced - The database restoration operation is performed regardless both the BACKUP-DATE, BACKUP-TIME indicated for the secondary backup database is older/prior to the BACKUP-DATE, BACKUP-TIME on the system (represented in label of the Active Local Primary Hard disk Database) and the SID indicated on the STBY DB does not match the SID of the system.

The software release identifier indicated for the secondary backup database does not match the software release identifier indicated for the system.

– Normal - The command is denied if there is a mismatch between the SID, the software release identifier, system type or the backup time stamp of the system and the information stored in the secondary backup database.

Click Default hyperlink, the Normal mode is set.

Click Apply, to activate the selected operation as shown below:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Apply hyperlink selection causes the ZIC main window closure and a secondary window is displayed to send the command and to notify the command completion status. If the command is successfully completed, the secondary window starts capturing restore database events and monitoring the web server availabilty after FLC switch. If the command is denied the user has to login to display the ZIC main window.

DB information

This option reads the database label of the selected backup database stored on the NE (primary backup database or secondary backup database).

The successful output response for this action displays one output line per selected database. The output displays the database AID and the associated database label. The unsuccessful output response for a RTRV-DB-LABEL command displays a separate non-parsable line of data.

A value for the calculated CRC is only returned in a successful response if the selected secondary backup database location contains a valid database.

Values for SYSTYPE, RLSID, SID, BACKUP-DATE, BACKUP-TIME are only returned in a successful response if the selected database exists.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Data Base -> DB Information as shown in Figure 3-73.

Figure 3-73 System management - DB information

The Database tab displays the Database Label panel that contains:

Access Identifier - It allows to identify the database. The values are: – Primary backup database (ACTDSKDB) – Secondary backup database (STBYDB)

Click Default, to set the Primary backup database (ACTDSKDB).

Click Retrieve hyperlink to recover the information about the selection made by Access Identifier as shown in Figure 3-74.



3-85

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-74 System management - primary backup DB information

Figure 3-75 System management - Secondary backup DB information

The Database tab displays the Database Label panel and Database Information table that contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Identifies the database. The values are: Primary backup

database (ACTDSKDB) or Secondary backup database (STBYDB) • System type - Identifies the system software for the database at the specified location

i.e. the equipment label (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160 in the example).

• Release Identification - Identifies the release ID of the system after the database restore command is completed, i.e. the equipment release (R02 in the example).

• Site Identifier - Indicates the SID of the system as provisioned (i.e. Vimercate in the example).

• Backup Date - For Primary backup database, identifies the date when the backup was created. For Secondary backup database, identifies the date when the last backup was created. The date is in the format of <YYYY>-<MM>-<DD>.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Backup Time - For Primary backup database, identifies the date when the backup was created. For Secondary backup database, identifies the date when the last backup was created. The date is in the format of <HH>-<MM>-<SS>.

• Cyclic Redundancy Check - Indicates the 8-digit hexadecimal value of the 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check stored on the backup media.

Remote file

This menu option contains the following three choices:• Perform Copy - It copies secondary backup database on the NE from/to specified

locations on a Remote File Server (RFS)• Cancel Copy - It interrupts an in-progress file transfer previously initiated• File Information - It is used to read information related to transferred files on a

Remote File Server

Perform copy

Only one of this option can be active on an NE at any given time. This option initiates the file upload/download operation and returns a complete response once the operation has been verified as possible and initiated. During the subsequent file transfer, the answers are generated every 30 seconds (+/- 15 seconds) to indicate the percentage of completion of the file transfer and the final completion status. During the transfer period, a Cancel Copy option can be used to abort the operation.

The command is used for data base transfer operations to and from remote devices (RFS) located in an IP-based DCN (Data Communication Network) through the (FTP) File Transfer Protocol.• Remote database backup - This option can be used to accomplish a remote database

backup. After creating a local backup of the primary backup database into the secondary backup database, the secondary backup database can be transferred to the RFS. A remote database backup request is denied if no valid secondary backup database exists on the system. (E.g., no database backup command was successfully performed before.)

• Remote database restoration - This option can be used to accomplish a remote database restore. After transferring an RFS DB to the secondary backup database on the system, the secondary backup database can be activated via the Restore Database option.

When an RFS DB is copied to the secondary backup database, the system makes sure that the directory path indicated in the Location parameter exists on the RFS. If it doesn’t, the operation fails.

The operation verifies the system type, software release identifier, time stamp and SID of the system against the information stored in the RFS backup. A copy operation with a system type mismatch cannot be performed.

A copy operation cannot be performed unless the Command Mode parameter is set to Forced.



3-87

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• with a software release identifier mismatch • with a SID mismatch • with a time stamp mismatch

During the database download operation, CRC checks are performed. If one check fails, the operation fails.

Table 3-4 Valid AID / input parameters combinations

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Remote File -> Perform Copy as shown in Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76 System management - copy remote file

The Remote File tab displays the Copy Remote File panel that contains the following parameters:• From - The combo-box supports the following input parameters:

– Secondary Backup Database (STBYDB) - The system's secondary backup database. It represents the secondary backup database that has been either created as copy of the primary backup database (by the Perform DB Backup option), or has been downloaded from RFS (by this option). A secondary backup database becomes the active database only by being activated via the Restore Database option. There is one instance of secondary backup database in the system.

From To Valid Parameter(s)

Secondary backup database Remote File Server Database Location, [Overwrite]

Remote File Server Database Secondary backup database Location, [Command Mode]

Remote File Server Software Standby software generic Location, [Overwrite]

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Remote File Server Database (RFSDB) - A database backup on a Remote File Server. It represents a database on a Remote File Server. Multiple instances of RFSDB can exist in different locations on an RFS. A specific instance is always addressed with this AID, with the addition of information in the LOCATION parameter in the command.

– Remote File Server Software (RFSSW) - A software generic on a remote file server. It represents a software generic on a Remote File Server. Multiple instances of RFSSW can exist in different locations on an RFS. A specific instance is always addressed with this AID, with the addition of information in the Location parameter in the panel.

• To - The combo-box supports the following input parameters: – Database Backup on a Remote File Server (RFSDB) - A database backup on a

Remote File Server– Secondary Backup Database (STBYDB) - The system's secondary backup

database– Standby Software Generic (STBYSW) - The standby software generic on the NE– Remote File Server PM Global File Collection (RFSPMGLB)

• Location - The following fields indicates the source/destination of the files on an RFS (Remote File Server) to be transferred. The syntax of the url is as follows: "ftp ://[<userid>[:<password>]@]<ftphost>[:<port>]/<url-path>" with: – User - Allows to enter the user identifier used for the ftp connection on the RFS– Password - Allows to enter the user password used for the ftp connection on the

RFS– Host - Allows to enter the IP address of the host (the Remote File Server) – Port - Allows to enter the port number to connect to. Most schemes designate

protocols that have a default port number. The default port number for ftp is 21– URL Path - Allows to enter the details of how the specified resource (i.e. the

directory where the file(s) reside) can be accessed. It has the following syntax: [/]<cwd1>/<cwd2>/.../<cwdN> where <cwd1> through <cwdN> are strings that identify directories. The <cwd1>-<cwdN> portion of the <url-path> is interpreted as a series of FTP commands as each of the cwd elements is to be supplied, sequentially, as the argument to an FTP CWD (change working directory) command.

• Command Mode - Allows copying an RFS DB to the secondary backup database on the system. • Forced - The operation is performed, regardless of the following:– The BACKUP-DATE and BACKUP-TIME on the RFS DB (represented in the

label on the RFS database) is older/prior to the BACKUP-DATE and BACKUP-TIME on the system (represented in label on the Active Hard disk Database)

– The SID indicated on the RFS DB does not match the SID of the system.



3-89

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– The software release/identifier indicated for RFS DB does not match the software release identifier indicated for the system.

• Normal (default value) - The command is denied if there is a mismatch between the SID, the release identifier, system stream, system type or the backup time stamp of the system and the information stored in the source database.

The Default hyperlink allows to set Normal automatically.

The Default hyperlink allows to set No automatically.

The panel has the Apply hyperlink that is used to apply the previous selections.

Cancel copy

This option interrupts an in-progress file transfer previously initiated by the Copy Remote File option. A subsequent activation of this option will start a file transfer from the beginning.

In case a remote upload file transfer is autonomously or manually canceled, partially transferred files might exist on the RFS after an upload gets canceled. The system does not take care of these remote files. It is the responsibility of the RFS maintained in this case to do the clean up, or to reuse the same storage location for future backups by using the overwrite option.

When this option completes successfully, the message indicates that the file transfer initiated by the Copy Remote File option was not completed successfully.

In the case where a Copy Remote File option is executing with parameter OVWRT set to Y, this option does not restore the data that was present before the Copy Remote File option command started.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Remote File -> Cancel Copy as shown in Figure 3-77.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-77 System management - cancel copy

The Remote File tab displays the Cancel Copy of Remote File panel that contains the following parameters:• From and To - Specifies the source and destination of the Remote File copy operation

The Apply hyperlink that is used to cancel the Remote File Database. The operation progress details are shown in the same page.

File information

This option is used to read information related to transferred files (i.e. database) on a Remote File Server.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Remote File -> File Information as shown in Figure 3-78.



3-91

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-78 System management - Remote file information

The Remote File Information panel contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Supports the following input parameters:

– Database Backup on a Remote File Server (RFSDB) (default value) - A database backup on a Remote File Server. It represents a database on a Remote File Server. Multiple instances of RFSDB can exist in different locations on an RFS. A specific instance is always addressed with this AID, with the addition of information in the LOCATION parameter in the command.

The Default hyperlink allows to set Database Backup on a Remote File Server (RFSDB) automatically.• Location - The following fields indicates the source/destination of the files on an RFS

to be transferred. The syntax of the url is as follows: "ftp ://[<userid>[:<password>]@]<ftphost>[:<port>]/<url-path>" with: – User - The entry box allows to digit the user identifier used for the ftp connection

on the RFS– Password - The entry box allows to digit the user password used for the ftp

connection on the RFS– Host - The entry box allows to digit the IP address of the host (the Remote File

Server) – Port - The entry box allows to digit the port number to connect to. Most schemes

designate protocols that have a default port number. The default port number for ftp is 21

– URL Path - The entry box allows to digit the details of how the specified resource (i.e. the directory where the file(s) reside) can be accessed. It has the following syntax: [/]<cwd1>/<cwd2>/.../<cwdN>where <cwd1> through <cwdN> are strings that identify directories. The <cwd1>-<cwdN> portion of the <url-path> is interpreted as a series of FTP commands as each of the cwd elements is to be supplied, sequentially, as the argument to an FTP CWD (change working directory) command.

The Retrieve hyperlink is used to recover the information about the selection.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-79 System management - retrieve file information

The Remote File Information panel, a warning table provide information about the transferred files (i.e. database) on a Remote File Server. The format complies with the following:• TL1 Command - The forwarded command used.• Status - This shown only in error case in the following row referred. • ErrorCode - This is referred the error abbreviation code. • Information - This is described the error or action executed.

Network element

This option retrieves general system level configuration information consisting of: system type, software release identifier, software release date, matrix size, system restart status.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Network Element as shown in Figure 3-80.



3-93

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-80 System management - System Configuration

The System Configuration panel contains the following that resumes:• Node Type - Identifies the role of the NE. Possible values are: ILA, UILA, or SWTCH• Access Identifier - Identifies the entity for which the output data are retrieved.

Possible values are: ACTSW (The active software generic on the NE) and STBYSW (The standby software generic on the NE).

• Matrix Size - Identifies the maximum matrix size in terms of bandwidth switching capacity in Gb/s (i.e., 320 for Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)

• Release Date - Identifies the date of the system software release in the format of <YY>-<MM>-<DD>

• Release Identification - Identifies the release ID of the system software. Possible value combination are {E, F, R, P}.{00-99}.{00-99}.{00-99}

• System Restart Process Status - Identifies the status of any system restart process. COMPLETE and IN-PROGRESS are the values

• System Type - Identifies the system type (i.e. Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)

Set site identifier

This option is used to set the Site Identifier (SID) code that is compared to any Target Identifier (TID) value entered in a text field.

If lower-case characters are entered for the SID, they are converted to an upper-case character string and stored as the SID value. If a quoted string is entered for the SID, no case conversion is applied. On completion of the option the new site identification is displayed in the response message.

Select System Management -> DB Management -> Set Site Identifier as shown in Figure 3-81.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-81 System management - set site identifier

The Set Site Identifier panel allows to change the Site identifier name; it contains:• Old Site Identifier - Shows the actual identifier.• New Site Identifier - Allows to enter the name of the identifier that you need to

change. The Double Quotes hyperlink allows to set the characters within enclosing double quotes. Empty double quotes (i.e. “”) indicate a NULL string.

The Set Site Identifier has the Save hyperlink that is used to apply the new site identifier.

Network time protocol

This option edits the Network Time Protocol parameters. Changes take place immediately.

Note: If no NTP server has been entered, and the NTP protocol is enabled, the time-of-day clock will synchronize with the last known internal clock frequency.

Select the System Management -> Network Time Protocol menu path as shown in Figure 3-82.



3-95

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-82 System management - network time protocol configuration

The page contains the Time and Date panel and Network Time Protocol panel.

The Time and Date panel shows the following information:– Current Date - Displays the current date.– Current Time - Displays the current time.The Date and Time options allows to manually set the system date and time by means of six combo-boxes Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Sec.

The Network Time Protocol panel shows the following information– Current NTP Server Synchronization - The time synchronization from the NTP

server; The value is Enabled or Disabled. – Current Offset - The time offset to apply to NTP server UTC time, +/- HH-MM,

for all events and time stamps reported by this NE. Factory default is +00-00– Current Operating Mode - The current operating mode of the NTP service. The

values are:• FREE-RUNNING NTP is not enabled, and the NE is not synchronized to an

NTP server and is instead using its own internal clock as a source.• HOLDOVER NTP is enabled but the NE has lost NTP server connectivity,

and is using the last known clock update to synchronize its clock.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• NTPSYNC NTP is enabled, and the NE is using the NTP protocol to synchronize to an NTP server.

– NTP Server Synchronization

Click Create hyperlink the following window opens:

The NTP Server Address Provision window contains:• Server IP Address - Allows to enter the IP address of an NTP server. the address in

the [0-126,128-223]-[0-255]-[0-255]-[0-255] format.

The window has the following hyperlinks:

Cancel - Allows to leave the page without applying the previously selections.

Save - Allows to apply the previous selections.

Security menuMenu bar


3-97

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Security menu

Purpose

The Security menu contains the following sub-menu options for user and administrative users:• User Account• Administration • Logout

All users can set the following items:• User Account

– Change Password - Activates the Change Password page– Account Information - Activates the "Account Information" page

• Logout - disconnects the user and the Authentication Page is displayed.

Administrator users can manage the following items:• Accounts

– Create an Account - To activate the Create Account page– Change an Account - To activate the Modify Account page– Default Settings - To activate the Account Default Settings page

• Current Sessions - To activate the Active Sessions page• Command Privileges - To activate the Command Access Privileges page• Audit - To activate the Audit Security Log page• Log - To activate the Log Settings page

User account

To activate the connection with the agent, all users must authenticate themselves using the User Authentication dialog box. Other security operation for all users are:• Change Password - To change the password;• Information - To see the account access privileges and settings.

Change password

This option is used by the administrator to retrieve the parameters in use for the security log.

Select Security -> User Account -> Change Password as shown in Figure 3-83.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-83 Change password

The home tab displays the Modify Password Identifier that contains the following parameters:• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID.• Old Password ID - Specifies the old user's login password.• New Password ID - Specifies the new user's login password.

The Save button sends the command to the agent, then the main page of the manager is displayed.

Information

This option is used by the administrator to retrieve the parameters in use for the security log.

Select Security -> User Account -> Information as shown in Figure 3-84.



3-99

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-84 Figure 5 - User information page

The User Information page displays the following fields:• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID (e.g. ALCATEL)• User Access Privileges - Specifies the User access privilege(s) granted to the user.

The values that can be displayed• User State - This shows the new user's login password. The values that can be

displayed are Active and Suspended• Password Duration [day] - Specifies the number of days of validity for the password.

The values that can be displayed are in the 0 - 999 range, 0 (zero) means that Password aging is disabled

• Warning on Password Duration [day] - This shows the number of days after the expiration date, that is allowed for the user to change the password. The values that can be displayed are in the 0 - 999 range, 0 (zero) means that grace period after password expiration is disabled.

• Access after Password Duration - This shows the number of times that a user can log in after Password expiration. The values that can be displayed are in the 0 - 999 range, 0 (zero) means that the grace extra log-in after password expiration is disabled.

• Password Obsolescence Interval [day] - This shows the minimum time interval that is required if the User wishes to use a password that was already used. The values that can be displayed are in the 0 - 999 range, 0 (zero) means that reuse of old passwords is disabled.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Password Expiration date and time - Specifies the expiry date and time for the password

• User ID Duration [day] - This shows the aging or expiry interval of a particular User Id. The values that can be displayed are in the 0 - 999 range, 0 (zero) means that User ID aging is disabled.

• Login Fails Number - Specifies the number of unsuccessful authentication (login) attempts since the last authenticated session

• Last Login Timestamp - This shows the last recorded Login time of a user• Keep Alive Message Interval [min] - This shows the time interval, in minutes, after

which the NE shall send a KEEPÂLIVE^MESSAGE on a TCP connection inactivity. The value range is 0 - 240. 0 (zero) means that KEEPÂLIVE^MESSAGE sending is disabled.

• Minimum Interval between Invalid Attempts [sec] - This shows the minimum interval, in seconds, between invalid login attempts before an NE shall logout a user and lockout the user channel. The value range is 0 - 60. 0 (zero) means no minimum interval between consecutive invalid login attempts.

• Max Invalid Attempts - This shows the maximum number of invalid login attempts before an NE shall logout a user and lockout the user channel. The value range is 0 - 15. 0 (zero) means that no limit to the invalid login attempts.

• User Session Inactivity Timeout [min] - This shows User Session Activity Link TimeOut, specifies the amount of time (in minutes) that the User Session link is inactive with regards to user TL1 input before a user session link time-out occurs. The value range is 0 - 999. 0 (zero) means that no user session link time–out will occur (disabled).

Administration

This menu allows to manage the following items: • Account - Managing the account• Current session - Retrieving the current session information• Command Privileges - Modifying the user privileges• Audit - Retrieving info• Log settings - Managing the log session

Account

This option helps to Create and Modify an Account and also Modify Account Default Settings.

Create account

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Create Account as shown in Figure 3-85.



3-101

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-85 Security - create user account page

The Create User Account panel contains the following parameters:• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID. It is a sequence from 5 to 12 case-

sensitive alphanumeric characters, where the first character must always be an alphabetic character. The following special characters are also accepted as valid characters and will be part of the User Identifier: % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (under score).

• Password Identifier - Specifies the user's login password. It is a sequence from 8 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters. The Password must contain at least 1 upper alphabetic character, at least 1 lower alphabetic character and at least 1 numeric character. The following special characters are also accepted as valid characters and can be part of the Password: % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (under score). The first character of the Password can be an alphabetic, numeric, or a valid special character.

• Password Duration [day] - Specifies the number of days of validity for the password. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that Password aging is disabled. Default is 30.

• Warning on Password Duration [day] - Specifies the number of days after the expiration date, that is allowed for the user to change the password. The valid range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that grace period after password expiration is disabled. Default is 7.

• Access after Password Duration - Specifies the number of times that a user can log in after Password expiration. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that the grace extra log-in after password expiration is disabled. Default is 3.

• Password Obsolescence Interval [day] - Specifies the minimum time interval that is required if the User wishes to use a password that was already used. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that reuse of old passwords is disabled. Default is 180.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• User ID Duration [day] - Specifies the aging or expiry interval of a particular User Id. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that User ID aging is disabled. The Default is 60.

The panel also displays the following two entry boxes:• Available User Access Privileges - Lists all the privileges for the User access. • User Access Privileges - This shows the privileges for the User access. The entry box

has the Default hyperlink in order to set the User access privileges forecast for the account.


The Save hyperlink that is used to apply the new User Account.

Change account

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Change Account as shown in Figure 3-86.



3-103

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-86 Security - Use Information page

The User Information page displays a table with complete information about all the users.

Default settings

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Default Settings as shown in Figure 3-87.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-87 Security - Account default settings

The Modify Account Default Settings panel displays the following parameters.• Password Duration [day] - Specifies the number of days of validity for the password.

The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that Password aging is disabled. Default is 30.

• Warning on Password Duration [day] - Specifies the number of days after the expiration date, that is allowed for the user to change the password. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that grace period after password expiration is disabled. Default is 7.

• Access after Password Duration - Specifies the number of times that a user can log in after Password expiration. The valid range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that the grace extra log-in after password expiration is disabled. Default is 3.

• Password Obsolescence Interval [day] - Specifies the minimum time interval that is required if the User wishes to use a password that was already used. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that reuse of old passwords is disabled. Default is 180.

• Keep Alive Message Interval [min] - Specifies the time interval, in minutes, after which the NE shall send a KEEPÂLIVE^MESSAGE on a TCP connection inactivity. The value range is 0 - 240. Default is 5.

• Minimum Interval after Invalid Access [min] - Specifies the minimum interval, in seconds, between invalid login attempts before an NE shall logout a user and lockout the user channel. The valid range is 0 - 60. Default is 15 seconds.

• Max Invalid Attempts - Specifies the maximum number of invalid login attempts before an NE shall logout a user and lockout the user channel. The value range is 0 - 15. Default is 5.



3-105

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Timeout [min] - Specifies User Session Activity Link TimeOut, specifies the amount of time (in minutes) that the User Session link is inactive with regards to user TL1 input before a user session link time-out occurs. The value range is 0 - 999. Default value is 15.

• User ID Duration [day] - Specifies the aging or expiry interval of a particular User Id. The value range is 0 - 999, 0 (zero) means that User ID aging is disabled. Default is 60.

• Max Number of session - Specifies the maximum number of sessions. Default is 6.

The Modify Account Default Settings page has the Save hyperlink that is used to apply the changes on User Account.

Current sessions

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Current Sessions as shown in Figure 3-88.

Figure 3-88 Security Page - current sessions

The page displays a table with information about current session.

The columns of the table are:• Action - Contains the Log Off User hyperlink which allows to close the session• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID (e.g. ALCATEL)• Session - Specifies by a unique identifier allocated to a client connection that

distinguishes that connection from other connections in the system• Address - Specifies the address where the user is connecting from. It is the port/IP

address that is being used for access. If a non IP port is used to connect to the NE, the values DCC, LAN, USB, RS232 are used

• Last login timestamp - Specifies by a quoted string the last recorded Login time of a user. This time is displayed every time a user logs in

Command privileges

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Command Privileges as shown in Figure 3-89.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-89 Security - Command access privileges page

The page the command security privileges assigned to the specified TL1 command. The columns of the table are:• Action - contains the hyperlinks in order to modify the security privilege. The

manager actions related to these hyperlinks are:– The Modify hyperlink activates the following Modify Command Access

Privileges page.



3-107

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-90 Security - modify command privileges page

• Command Identifier - Specifies the TL1 command code. The value for the parameter can be any one of the TL1 command codes, in upper or lower case excluding the following TL1 command codes (i.e. the commands for factory default):– ALW-USER-SECU - Allows to reinstate users, so the user can again establish a

session with the system– ACT-USER - Authenticates a session established with the system by logging in an

existing user through a User Identifier and a Password Identifier– CANC-USER - Unauthenticates a session with the addressed NE (identified by

optional TID parameter)., whether or not that session was previously authenticated by an ACT-USER command, by logging off the user

– CANC-USER-SECU - Unauthenticates a session with the addressed NE (identified by optional TID parameter)., whether or not that session was previously authenticated by an ACT-USER command, by logging off the specified user

– DLT-USER-SECU - Deletes user profiles in the User Security Database, for the specified User Identifier (UID)

– ED-CMD-SECU - This is used by an user with security administrator privileges to change the command access security level (CAP - Command Access Privilege) assigned to a TL1 command

– ED-USER-SECU - This is used by a user with security administrator privileges to edit the existing user profile entry, identified by the User Identifier (UID), in the User Security Database

– ENT-USER-SECU - This is used to create a new user profile in the User Security Database

– INH-USER-SECU - Allows a user with security administrator privileges to inhibit (i.e., disable) existing users (without deleting the user account), so the users can be denied to get an authorized session with the system (i.e., the inhibited users cannot log on).

• Command Access Privilege - Allows to chose the User access privilege(s) granted to the user.

Audit

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Audit as shown in Figure 3-91.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-91 Security - Audit Log page

The Retrieve Audit Log page contains the Retrieve Audit Log panel with the following parameters:• From - Specifies the beginning date and time used to filter the response messages. By

means the combo-boxes it is possible to change data and time• To - Specifies the beginning date and time used to filter the response messages. By

means the combo-boxes it is possible to change data and time• UID - The combo-box allows to select the user identifier:

– ALL– ALCATEL– USER05– USER06

The Retrieve hyperlink sends the command to the agent, then the "Retrieve Audit Log" page is reloaded and the table with Security log is displayed as shown in Figure 3-92 or in Figure 3-93 without results.



3-109

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-92 Security - retrieve audit page with results

Figure 3-93 Security - retrieve audit page without results

Log settings

Select Security -> Administration -> Account -> Log Settings as shown in Figure 3-94.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-94 Security - Log attributes

The Modify Log Attributes page is made up of description of the TL1 command and the Modify Log Attributes panel that contains:

– Current Log File Max Size [Mbyte] - Specifies the size, in 1 Megabyte blocks, of the Security Log File system's disk buffer.

– New Log File Max Size [Mbyte] - Allows to change the size, in 1 Megabyte blocks, of the Security Log File system's disk buffer. When the SECULOG has reached its max size, the SECULOG wraps reducing its size to the 70% of its max size discarding the oldest events (30%). The Default hyperlink allows to set the relevant value automatically.

– Current Warning Message - This is the provisioned user-logon warning message is shown.

– Warning Message - Allows to provision user-logon warning message. The Default hyperlink allows to set the relevant warning message automatically.

– New Warning Message - Allows to provision a new user-logon warning message. The Default hyperlink allows to set the relevant warning message automatically. The Set Empty hyperlink allows to deplete the entry field.

– Current Log Events - Specifies the current log event.– Available Log Events - Specifies the list of events that, upon their occurrence, are

included in the security log (i.e., events that are specified for logging, if they occur). The values are:



3-111

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Authentication Event (EIUA) - It logins, logoffs, invalid user authentication attempts and the alarms/alerts generated due to the invalid authentication attempts.

– Changes to the User's Security Accounts (EUSP) - Specifies the details of the changes made in a user's security profiles and attributes.

– Changes to the NE/NS Security Configuration (ESCC) - Specifies the details of changes made in the NE/NS security configuration.

– Changes to NE/NS resources (ECMR) - Specifies the creation and modification of NE/NS resources performed via standard operations and maintenance procedures. This does not address creations and modifications carried offline. Commands creating log events of this type are all the commands not mentioned in the lists above, having Y in the security field of the command security table.

– All Events (ALL) All events• New Log Events - This shows the log events for the command. The entry box has the

Default hyperlink in order to set the User access privileges forecast for the account.


The Save hyperlink send the command to the agent, then the main page is reloaded.

Logout

This option allows the user to leave the session. Select Security -> Logout as shown in Figure 3-95.

Figure 3-95 Security - Logout page

The Logout tab displays the Logout panel that contains:• User Identifier - Specifies a unique user ID. Clicking on the Default hyperlink the

current user identifier is set in the field

Click Yes hyperlink to return to the previous page with authentication dialog box. See Figure 3-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tools menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tools menu

Purpose

The Tools menu allows the operator to open a Telnet console for TL1 commands. It contains the following options:• TL1 Console• NE TL Parameter

TL1 console

Select Tools - > TL1 console menu option as shown in Figure 3-96.

Figure 3-96 Tools - TL1 console

In order to use this facility it is necessary to access the Telnet console.1. Enter User and Password fields with the log accessing data.2. Click on Connect hyperlink.

Tools menuMenu bar


3-113

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-97 Tools - Accessing TL1 console

3. When the Telnet session is open the client area becomes as follows.

Figure 3-98 Tools - Telnet console

The lower part it is used to digit the TL1 command, while in the upper part, the answer to the TL1 Telnet command is shown.

4. Entering the TL1 command (e.g. RTRV-ALM-ALL) and press enter. The following screen appears as shown in Figure 3-99.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tools menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-99 Tools - TL1 command

5. After a loading process, the results are referred in the upper part of the page (see Figure 3-100) according to the TL1 command syntax that can be seen by the TL1 syntax hyperlink as shown in Figure 3-101.

Tools menuMenu bar


3-115

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-100 Tools - TL1 command answer

Figure 3-101 Tools - TL1 command syntax

6. Clicking on Quit hyperlink the user closes the Telnet session and the page in Figure 3-96 is shown.

For detailed information about the TL1 command, please refer to the relevant “TL1 Operator Guide”.

NE TL1 param

Select NE TL1 Param option from the Tools menu as shown in Figure 3-102.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tools menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-102 NE TL1 parameters

The NE TL1 tab displays the NE TL1 Parameters panel that contains the following parameters:• IP Row encoding Port• IP Telnet encoding Port• Prompt• MAP Size

The Save link allows the user to save the NE TL1 parameters.

Help menuMenu bar


3-117

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help menu

Purpose

The Help menu allows the operator to obtain information about the below options:• About software version• Help On Line for the Guide in HTML format• NE TL1 Syntax for the available TL1 commands meaning.

About

This menu allows the operator to obtain information about the software version.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Help - > About option the following window appears as shown in Figure 3-103.

Figure 3-103 Help - about

The About page contains the following parameters:• Release 2.0 - Specifies the product release.• Delivery date - Specifies the installation date of the ZIC release.• ZIC Pack Release - Specifies the package release date.• ZIC APPLICATION Release - Specifies the application release date.• TL1Plugin - Specifies the version of TL1 release.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help menuMenu bar


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Help On Line

This menu allows the operator to locally read the User Provisioning Guide without collecting the handbook.

NE TL1 Syntax

This menu allows the operator to obtain information about the TL1 command syntax.

From the application menu bar, selecting the Help - > NE TL1 Syntax option the following window appears:

Figure 3-104 Help Page - NE TL1 Syntax

The NE TL1 Syntax page contains the NE TL1 COMMAND HEADER entry field, where it is possible to digit a TL1 command.

In the TL1 Command INFO text field the information about the parameters of the entered TL1 command is displayed.

By means of the Send hyperlink it is possible to send the command to the NE.

For detailed information about the TL1 commands, please refer to the relevant “TL1 Operation Guide”.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Tree area

Contents

This section contains the following topics:

Scope 4-2

Access the aggregation management resources 4-5

LAG configuration 4-8

Access the rack resources 4-18

Access the shelf resources 4-20

Access the unit 4-26

Access a module 4-31

Access a resource 4-35

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ScopeTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Scope

Purpose

The aim of this chapter is to introduce the Zero-Installation Craft terminal utilities and navigation through the system using the Tree area.

System access

Start the Craft Terminal as described in “System access” (p. 3-3) as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 ZIC browser page

The ZIC browser page displays the tree area in the left pane that allows the operator to select the resources from a list. Click on the NE icon to expand the tree as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 Tree area

The tree area displays the following resources:• NE (Network Element) - Identified by an Access Identifier• CTRL PLANE - To manage the Control Plane Transport ports within the Alcatel-

Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160).• AM (Aggregation management) - To view the available LAG (Link Aggregation)• RACK - Each rack is identified by a number.

NE name

NE rack

Control planeManagement

ScopeTree area


4-3

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• SHELF - Each shelf is identified by a number joined with the rack and by the Provisioned Type label. All the available units/packs of the shelf are listed.

Figure 4-3 Tree area expanded

The above figure displays the tree area with the following information:• Command Parts

– EC320– MT320– PSF320– FAN

• SONET units– 10GSO card– 8XSO card

• DATA units– 20G Layer 2 Aggregator card

• PP10AD with PMMS

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ScopeTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the aggregation management resourcesTree area


4-5

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the aggregation management resources

Overview

Purpose

Click AM (Aggregation Management) icon from the tree area as shown in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 Exp and the Aggregation Management icon to view the available LAG.

Figure 4-4 Aggregation management tree

The user can select one of the LAG-x (Link Aggregation Group) icon and the client area displays as shown in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-5 AM tree

The Link Aggregation Management tab displays the existing LAGs and a Link Aggregation Creation panel that contains the following parameters:• Name - Allows to set the name of the LAG. The only suffix after “#” can be set by the

user, with an integer in the range 1-123.

Aggregation Management

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Admin State - Indicates the administration status. The entry field can be set only after the LAG creation option, see “LAG configuration” (p. 4-8). The values are: enable (the LAG is in-service) or disable (the LAG is out-of-service).

• Type - Indicates the type of port (read only field, fixed by the system to “ieee8023adLag”).

• LACP Type - Indicates if the Link Aggregation Control Protocol is ON (i.e. lacpOn is active on this aggregator) or OFF (IacpOff inactive); It is a read only field fixed by the system.

• User Label - Indicates the LAG name as defined by the user.• Size - Allows to set the size of the LAG, i.e. number of Aggregated Ports. The values

are integers in the range 0-16.• Actor Admin Key - Indicates the LAG “Key”, the parameter identifying this LAG;

integer in the range 1-123.• EthClient Type - The entry field can be set only after creation, see “Client Type

Management panel” (p. 4-11). Possible values are ets (for Ethernet Transparent System) or etb (for Ethernet Bridge System).

• Actor System Priority - Indicates the LAG Priority. This parameter, together with the LAG Mac Address, forms the “System Identifier”. The lowest System Identifier value will be elected as the “Master” of the link, i.e. the one that will drive the actions in case of events such as failures, switches, etc. Possible values are integers in the range 0-65535.

• Asap Name - The entry field shows the name of alarms profile to be associated to the current Port. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value is reported.

• MTU - The entry field allows to set the Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU); size of the largest packet which can be sent on this LAG interface, specified in octets. Allowed values are integers in the range 1574- 9216.

• VLAN Protocol Profile - Indicates the name of the 2-bytes provider (S-VLAN-Protocol Type) contained into the S-Vlan ethernet frames afferent to the current Port.

• Encaps Method - Indicates the method of MAC packets encapsulation inside the underlying physical layer. The options are: ethernetV2 (default mode, set by the system) or IEEE8023 (not yet operative).

• Layer2 control frame (0x) - The entry field permits to enable or disable the Protocol Frames that can accede to this port. The allowable value can be selected by means of the Bitmask details hyperlink which opens the window.

The panel has the Save hyperlink that saves the settings.

The table contains the following columns associated to a check box for the selection:• Name - It shows the name of the LAG with the suffix after “#” and an integer in the

range 1-123. • User Label - It shows the LAG name defined by the user.

OverviewTree area


4-7

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Protocol Profile - It shows the name of the 2-bytes provider (S-VLAN-Protocol Type) contained into the S-Vlan ethernet frames afferent to the current Port.

• Admin State - It shows the administration status.

The table in the Figure 4-5 has the following hyperlinks:– Configuration - To start the configuration procedure described in “LAG

configuration” (p. 4-8).– Delete - To delete the selected LAG.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LAG configurationTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LAG configuration

Description

Click Configuration hyperlink in the Link Aggregation Creation panel or click LAG-x icon in the tree area, as shown in Figure 4-6.



4-9

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-6 LAG configuration

The page displays functional tabs based on the LAG client type:– not provisioned LAG (greyed icon): LAG, IN-FLOWS and OUT-FLOWS

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– ETS provisioned LAG (blue icon): LAG, IN-FLOWS, OUT-FLOWS, Configure IGMP and IGMP Properties

– ETB provisioned LAG (orange icon): (LAG, BRIDGE, Configure IGMP and IGMP Properties)

The Link Aggregator Configuration tab displays the following parameters:

LAG functional tab

The LAG functional tab in the Link Aggregator configuration tab displays the following four panels:

Link aggregator configuration panel

The Link Aggregator configuration panel contains the parameters previously described in on page 5 with the following differences: • Name - As described in the previous section. A read only field.• Admin State - Allows to set the Administration status. Possible values are: enable

(the LAG is in-service) or disable (the LAG is out-of-service)• Type - As previously described, but read only field• Oper. State - The read-only field indicates the current operational status of the Port,

information about the actual state of the Aggregation Port regarding the traffic; possible values: up (the traffic on Aggregation Port is active) or down (the traffic on Aggregation Port is inactive).

• User Label - Indicates the LAG by means of a name defined by the user• Bandwidth - Indicates the actually used Bandwidth of the LAG, after that Aggregated

Ports have been associated to this LAG. It is the sum of Aggregated Ports rates • Actor Admin Key - Indicates the LAG “Key”, the parameter identifying this LAG;

integer in the range 1 -123• Available Band - Indicates the remaining Bandwidth of the LAG, not yet used by

Aggregated Ports• Actor System Priority - Indicates the LAG Priority. This parameter, together with the

LAG Mac Address, forms the “System Identifier”. The lowest System Identifier value will be elected as the “Master” of the link, i.e. the one that will drive the actions in case of events such as failures, switches, etc. Possible values are integers in the range 0-65535.

• Flooding rate - Allows to set the maximum rate of packets having unknown Addresses, for this LAG, that can be flooded to all ports.

• Actor System ID - A read-only field fixed by the system indicates the “System Identifier”, composed of the LAG Mac Address and the above Actor System Priority. The LAG having the lowest LAG-System Identifier value will be elected as the “Master” of the LAG link, i.e. the one that will drive the actions in case of events such as failures, switches, etc.



4-11

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• LACP Type - Indicates if the Link Aggregation Control Protocol is ON (i.e. lacpOn is active on this aggregator) or OFF (IacpOff inactive); read only field, fixed by the system.

• LACP Enabled - Specifies if the LACP is enabled or disabled.• Actor Op. key - A read-only field fixed by the system indicates the actual operational

value of LAG-key for this LAG.• Size - Allows to set the size of the LAG, i.e. number of Aggregated Ports. The values

are integers in the range 0 to 16.• Asap Name - An entry field displays the name of alarms profile to be associated to the

current Port. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.– MTU - Allows to set the Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU); size of the largest

packet which can be sent on this LAG interface, specified in octets. Allowed values are integers in the range 1574-9216.

– Protocol Profile - The entry field indicates the name of the 2-bytes provider (S-VLAN-Prototypal) contained into the S-Vlan ethernet frames afferent to the current Port.

– Encaps Method - The entry field indicates the method of MAC packets encapsulation inside the underlying physical layer. Possible options are: ethernetV2 (default mode, set by the system) or IEEE8023 (not yet operative).


Cancel - To exit return to the previous page.

Save & continue - To apply the previous settings and restart with new configuration.

Save & exit - To apply the previous settings and return to the previous page.

Client Type Management panel

The Client Type Management panel contains the following parameter: • EthClient Type - Allows to set the transported layer. Possible values are: ets (for

Ethernet Transparent System) or etb (for Ethernet Bridge System) or LinkAgg (for Link Aggregation System).

Traffic Management panel

The Traffic Management panel shows the Port Traffic State: The options are: enabled (the traffic over this resource is alive) or disabled (the traffic over this resource is shut-down).

Group Segregation panel

The Group Segregation panel shows the PORT LAG-x: Possible options are: Enable Participation or Disable Participation according to the real status.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Link aggregator configuration panel

A second Link Aggregator configuration panel contains the following read-only parameters: • MacAddress - Indicates the MAC-Address assigned to the selected LAG• N. Selected Ports - Indicates the number of selected ports, that are potentially

aggregable on this Aggregator• Partner System Id - Indicates the “System Identifier” of the “Partner”, i.e. the

connected remote LAG.• N. Attached Ports - Indicates the number of attached ports, that are actually

aggregated on this Aggregator.• Partner Admin Key - Indicates the LAG “Key” of the “Partner” LAG as set by the

user, integer in the range 0-122.• Primary Port - Indicates the “Primary Port”, i.e. the one selected among all

aggregated ports, for carrying special traffic (such as Multicast/BroadCast, xSTP-BPDU, unknown addressed packets flooding, etc.). Primary Port is the first one created in the LAG.

• Partner Operator Key - Indicates the actual operational LAG “Key” of the “Partner” LAG as set by the system.

• Primary Port Position - Indicates the position of the “Primary Port” on the equipment connectors.

• Partner System Priority - Indicates the LAG Priority of the “Partner” LAG. This parameter, together with the LAG MacAddress, forms the “System Identifier”. The values are integers in the range 0-65535.

• Number - Indicates the reference number of this LAG, as set by the system.

IN-FLOWS functional tab

The IN-FLOWS tab allows to manage internal resource used into a Local or Remote ethernet port, in order to define and characterize an incoming ethernet data flow.

Click IN-FLOWS functional tab in the Link Aggregator configuration tab as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 IN-flows configuration

The Link Aggregator configuration tab displays the following parameters:



4-13

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Resource - Refers the indexed name assigned by the system to the resource; the index is incremental over all the existing inflows of all the ports. It is also a hyperlink that opens the page described in “Resource details” (p. 4-13).

• Type - It refers the upper layer service type: ethernet. • S-VID - It refers the stacked VLAN identifier associated to this InFlow.• User label - It refers the name assigned by the user to describe this resource. The

format is <1-30 VALID NAME CHARACTERS>.• XConnection - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe the cross-connection

related to the IN-FLOW. It is also a hyperlink that opens the page described in “XConnection details” (p. 4-15).

Resource details

Click Resource from the In-Flows tab as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 IN-FLOWS resource details

The page displays the Inflow and Classifier Criteria panels:a. Inflow panel– State - This is the notification about the actual status of the resource; active (the

resource is in-service); not active (the resource is out-of-service).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– User label - Allows the user to digit a name to describe this resource. The format is <1-30 VALID NAME CHARACTERS>.

– Service Type - Refers the upper layer service type: ethernet. – Flow type - The options: unicastNoAutolearning (for unicast cross-connection

link) or multicast OptionA (for multicast cross-connection link - not available in current release).

– Traffic descriptor - Allows to select the traffic type. Possible values are: beffort (Best Effort Service) or guar (Guaranteed Service) or reg (Regulated Service).

– Layer 2 control frames (0x) - Allows to enable or disable the Protocol Frames that can accede the port. Clicking on the Bitmask details button it is possible to display and set the bitmask.

– Actual Layer 2 control frames (0x) - Refers about the enabling or disabling the Protocol Frames that accedes the port.

– Policing mode - Refers about the policing on the incoming ETS traffic. Possible options: disabled (the policing is not performed) or color-blind (the policing is based on the associated TD, without taking into account the “prioritization”) or color-aware (the policing is based on the associated TD and on the priority colors of the associated “Color profile").

– Color profile - Refers about the name of the association between the incoming S-VLAN priorities and the forwarded frames coloring (for scheduling purposes, inside the bridge). If a Color Profile is associated, the priority field of the relevant associated Classifier is different from untagged or don't care; further the TD type is regulated.

– VLAN pop - If enabled it pops out the “Stacked-VLAN" shim fields of the ethernet frame. SVLAN tags transport information used by an external provider network. The options are: enabled or disabled. If this is enabled, the “priority" field of the relevant Classifier must be different from untagged or don't care.

The panel contains the following hyperlinks:

Cancel - To cancel the settings and return to the previous page.

Save - To apply the previous settings and return to the previous page.

Deactivate - To change the State field only and return to the previous page.

Add a classifier - To open the relevant page, it allows to set a further classifier.b. Classifier Criteria panel– Classifier index: This is an incremental index assigned by the system to the

resource.– State: This is the notification about the actual status of the resource; active (the

resource is in-service); not active (the resource is out-of-service).– Configuration type: It refers the transmission parameters of the 1850TSS Data

Node. Possible options: manual (in this case the STP function is not active) or STP (for simple Spanning Tree Protocol functions) or RSTP (for Rapid Spanning Tree



4-15

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Protocol functions) or MSTP (for “Multiple" Spanning Tree Protocol functions; in order to manage the union of more subnetworks. In this case, a sub-network will be treated as a single bridge. Not available in “MAC-Bridge" case. The MAC bridge mode can be accomplished by using a “Virtual” bridge).

– Priority bits: It refers the prioritization of an Ethernet data flow on the 3 “user-priority" bits (802.1p) of the “Tagged-Ethernet" frame and also on the 3 “provider-priority" bits of the “Stacked-Vlan" frame. the range is also shown in the From: and To: fields.

– VLAN: It refers the indexed value assigned by the system to this profile. – Specific value: It refers the stacked-Vlan identifier that will be pushed into the

ethernet frame in the 0 to 4095 range.


Cancel - To cancel the existing settings and return to the previous page.

Deactivate - To change the State field only and return to the previous page.

Delete - To remove the classifier from the list.

XConnection details

Click one of the item in the XConnection column as shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 IN-FLOWS XConnection details

The XConnection tab displays the Data Connection panel that contains the following parameters:• Service type - Refers UNI-UNI, or UNI-NNI, or NNI-UNI. The existing cross-

connections are listed into the table area.• State - This is the notification about the actual status of the resource; active (the

resource is in-service); not active (the resource is out-of-service).• Traffic descriptor - Refers about the traffic type. The values are: beffort (Best Effort

Service) or guar (Guaranteed Service) or reg (Regulated Service).• S-VID - Refers the stacked VLAN identifier associated to this InFlow.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• From: To: - Refers about the location of the Cross-connection.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel - To cancel the settings return to the previous page.– Delete XC ONE STEP - To delete a “One-Step" cross-connection, that was

previously created.

ALL INVOLVED RESOURCES... table

• xcId - This is an incremental index assigned by the system to the resource.• From - Refers the indexed name assigned by the system to the resource; the index is

incremental over all the existing inflows of all the ports.• From user label - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe this resource.• To - Refers the indexed name assigned by the system to the resource; the index is

incremental over all the existing inflows of all the ports.• To user label - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe this resource.

OUT-FLOWS functional tab

The OUT-FLOWS allows to manage internal resource used into a “Local" or “Remote" ethernet port, in order to define and characterize an outgoing ethernet data flow.

Select OUT-FLOWS functional tab from the Link Aggregator configuration tab as shown in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10 OUT-FLOWS configuration

The OUT-FLOWS tab displays the following parameters:• Resource - Refers the indexed name assigned by the system to the resource; the index

is incremental over all the existing outflows of all the ports. It is also a hyperlink that opens the page described in “XConnection - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe the cross-connection related to the OUT-FLOW. It is also a hyperlink which opens the page previously described in “XConnection details” (p. 4-15)” (p. 4-17).

• Type - Refers the upper layer service type.• S-VID - Refers the stacked VLAN identifier associated to this InFlow.• User label - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe this resource. The

format is <1-30 VALID NAME CHARACTERS>.



4-17

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• XConnection - Refers the name assigned by the user to describe the cross-connection related to the OUT-FLOW. It is also a hyperlink which opens the page previously described in “XConnection details” (p. 4-15)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the rack resourcesTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the rack resources

Overview

Purpose

Select RACK-x node as shown in Figure 4-11. The tree expands and displays the SHELF subtree.

Figure 4-11 Rack tree

The user can select one of the RACK-x icon and the client area displays rack information as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Rack page

The Rack x tab displays the Rack-x panel and a table that contains the following parameters. The UP Rack x panel resumes the rack information and displays the following read-only fields: • Access Identifier - Specifies the equipment entity access identifier.• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the equipment entity. The value is RACK.• Actual Type - Specifies the physically equipped entity type (see Current

Provisioned Type).

NE Rack

OverviewTree area


4-19

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Primary/secondary state - Specifies the primary and secondary service state.

The table displays the following details relevant to the rack:• Shelf - This column lists all the available shelf/shelves of the rack.• Resource - In this column is specified the access identifier of the shelf/shelves (type

and position). It is also shown in the tree. The allowable values are:– SWTCH Shelf Type TDM and packet switch– ROADM Shelf Type WDM ROADM– UROADM Shelf Type In-Service Upgraded WDM– ILA In-Line Amplifier Shelf Type and Repeater Node– UILA In-Line Upgradeable Amplifier Shelf Type and Repeater Node– OMD Optical Multiplexer Demultiplexer Shelf Type

• PST - Specifies the primary state of the shelf.• SST - Specifies the secondary state of the shelf.• Provisioned - Specifies the name of the shelf. It is also shown in the tree.• Actual - Specifies the physically equipped shelf type.

In the upper part of the page there are some tabs (alarms, equipment and Rack x). Clicking on the equipment tab the client area shows the actual rack layout as depicted in the following.

Figure 4-13 Rack layout page

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the shelf resourcesTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the shelf resources

Overview

Purpose

Select SHELF-x-x: yyyy node from the tree area. The tree expands and shows the shelf composition subtree as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Shelf tree

The user can select one of the SHELF-x-x; yyy node from the tree area and the client area displays the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-15.

NE Shelf

OverviewTree area


4-21

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-15 Shelf page (e.g. SWITCH shelf)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Rack x > Shelf x-x tab displays the UP Rack-x > Shelf-x and FW/SW Version Data panel that contains the following parameters.

The UP Rack x Shelf x panel resumes the shelf info and displays the following read-only fields: • Access Identifier - Specifies the equipment entity.• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the equipment entity.• Actual Type - Specifies the physically equipped entity type (see Current Provisioned

Type).• Primary/secondary state - Specifies the primary and secondary service state. The

allowable values are the same previously described in “Access the rack resources” (p. 4-18).

• Shelf ID - Specifies, for the Shelf Types (UNVRL320/UNVRL160), the provisioned shelf identification value. It can range from 1-31.

• Shelf Role - Specifies, for the Shelf Types (UNVRL320/UNVRL160), the provisioned shelf role. The value can be: MAIN (main shelf of the NE) or NOMAIN (extension shelf of the NE).

• Shelf WDM Role - Specifies, for the Shelf Types (SWTCH, ROADM, UROADM, ILA and UILA), the provisioned shelf WDM role. The value can be: WDMMASTER (master shelf of the WDM set of shelves in NE) or WDMSLAVE (slave shelf of the WDM set of shelves in NE).

The Restart panel resets the specified equipment entity and displays the following fields: • Access Identifier - Specifies the equipment entity.• Phase - Allows to select the type of restart. The values are:

– WARM: Reload of dynamic data only (db in RAM).– COLD: Reload of dynamic and static data (db and sw). It is supported by MT320,

EC320, IOC. It is used with AID = ALL for normal full reset of the NE (cold restart of EC320 followed by cold restart of MT320).

– POWER-ON: full restart (as if unplugged and plugged), including processor restart and reloading sw and db. It is supported by MT320. It is used with AID=ALL for power-on full reset of the NE (cold restart of EC320, power-on restart of MT320, cold restart of IOCs).

• Command Mode - Allows to select the Command Execution Mode. The values are:– NORM - Normal, the command is denied if the result of its execution is service-

affecting.– FRCD - Forced, the command is completed even if the result of its execution is

service-affecting.

The Alarms panel contains the View Hyperlink, on clicking this the list of alarms associated with the shelf are displayed.

The table contains the following details relevant to the shelf:• Board - Lists all the shelf slots.

OverviewTree area


4-23

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Resource - Specifies the access identifier of the shelf/shelves (type and position). It is also shown in the tree. The values are:– TBUS320 Termination Bus (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-

320/160)– EC320 Equipment Controller (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– MT320 Matrix and Timing (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– POW320 Power (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– FAN320 FAN Unit Tray (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– 1P10GSO 10G Synchronous Optical– 4P2G5SO 4x2.5G Synchronous Optical– 8PSO 8 x Synchronous Optical– 1POTU2 G.709 OTU 10GB Card– 10XANY 10GB 10 x GBE/Sonet– PIMMS (PIM MUltiservice 10G)– PIM1GE (PIM 10x1GE Optical)– PIM10GE (PIM 1x10GE Optical)– LDRXA (Receiver Amp16 dBm + OSC)– LDRXB (Receiver Amp20 dBm + OSC)– LDTXA (Transmitter Amp20 dBm + OSC)– LDTXB (Transmitter OSC)– OPS (Optical Protection Switch)– WR4 (Wavelength Router - four optical lines)– WR8 (Wavelength Router - eight optical lines)– 11GBAR (single port 11G bidirectional anyrate optical translator)– 11GUAR (single port 11G unidirectional anyrate optical translator (drop))– MDL (generic AID of a traffic bearing equipment that is not yet provisioned). The

relevant row is provided with the provision hyperlink in order to start the provisioning procedure

Each field is a hyperlink also; clicking on it, the Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx tab page is presented (see “Access the unit” (p. 4-26)). • PST - Specifies the primary state of the shelf.• SST - Specifies the secondary state of the shelf.• Provisioned - Specifies the name of the shelf. It is also shown in the tree.• Actual - Specifies the physically equipped shelf type.

In the upper part of the page there are some tabs (alarms, equipment and Shelf x-x). Click equipment tab the client area shows the actual shelf layout as shown in Figure 4-16.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-16 Shelf layout page

Selecting one board the Details message pop-ups and it is possible to accessing the physical resource as in the following “Access the unit” (p. 4-26) is described.

OverviewTree area


4-25

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-17 Shelf detail message

Selecting one empty slot the Provision... message pop-ups (see Figure 4-18) and it is possible to start the provisioning procedure.

Figure 4-18 Shelf provisioning message

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the unitTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access the unit

Overview

Purpose

Select a Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx in the tree area as shown in Figure 4-19.

OverviewTree area


4-27

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-19 Access a unit (e.g. 10XANY)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx tab page presents two panels and a table. The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx panel contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Specifies the Equipment Access Identifier, identifies the

equipment entity access identifier• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the Provisioned module type. It is also shown

in the tree. The values are:– TBUS320 Termination Bus (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– EC320 Equipment Controller (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– MT320 Matrix and Timing (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– POW320 Power (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– FAN320 FAN Unit Tray (Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320/160)– 1P10GSO 10G Synchronous Optical– 4P2G5SO 4x2.5G Synchronous Optical– 8PSO 8 x Synchronous Optical– 10XANY 10GB 10 x GBE/Sonet– PP20G 4 port 20G L2 Switch– PIMMS (PIM MUltiservice 10G)– PIM1GE (PIM 10x1GE Optical)– PIM10GE (PIM 1x10GE Optical)– LDRXA (Receiver Amp16 dBm + OSC)– LDRXB (Receiver Amp20 dBm + OSC)– LDTXA (Transmitter Amp20 dBm + OSC)– LDTXB (Transmitter OSC)– OPS (Optical Protection Switch)– WR4 (Wavelenght Router - four optical lines)– WR8 (Wavelenght Router - eight optical lines)– 11GBAR (single port 11G bidirectional anyrate optical translator)– 11GUAR (single port 11G unidirectional anyrate optical translator (drop))– OMD44 (optical channel multiplexor/demultiplexor - 44 channels)

• Actual Type - Specifies the physically equipped module type (see Current Provisioned Type).

• Primary/secondary state - Specifies the primary and secondary service state.• Primary State - To change the primary state to which the unit is set. The choices are:

– IS: In Service - The module is providing service.– OOS-AU Out of Service, Autonomous - The module is out of service due to an

autonomous event.

OverviewTree area


4-29

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– OOS-MA Out of Service, Management - The module is out of service due to management action.

– OOS-AUMA Out of Service, Autonomous and Management - The module is out of service both due to an autonomous event and management action.

• Automatic In Service Mode - To change the Automatic in service mode to which the unit is set. The choices are:– NOWAIT - A condition notifies the module is unplugged.– AINS - No condition is sent due to module unplugged.

• Auto-Provisioning - Specifies the Auto provisioning parameter is used to manage the Autoprovisioning functionality in case of global (Shelf/NE level) restart: its main purpose is to prevent the autoprovisioning of a Card (after a restart) in a slot position in which it has been logically deleted. It cannot be provisioned, it is managed only by the NE but can be retrieved. The choices are:– ON - Autoprovisioning Allowed in that slot position.– OFF - Autoprovisioning Not-Allowed in that slot position.

• Command Mode - To change the status of the unit. The values are:– NORM (normal)– FRCD (forced)

• Alarm Profile - Specifies the label of the ASAP that is used for the unit. Click Select hyperlink to select a different profile.

The Restart panel displays the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Specifies the Access Identifier of the equipment.• Phase - Specifies to check the status of the unit. The default value is COLD.• Command Mode - To change the status of the unit. The values are:

– NORM (normal)– FRCD (forced)

The panel has the following hyperlinks:• Save - To apply the settings and restart with new selection.• Remove - Causes the specified facility client/line to be placed in an out-of-service

(OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA) state for maintenance purposes.

The Alarm panel contains the View hyperlink that allows to show all the actual alarm.

The VCG resources available selection panel allows to show available VCG resources.

The table contains the following details relevant to the unit:• Module - Lists all the available module of the unit. • Resource - Specifies the access identifier of the module (type and position). It is also

shown in the tree. Click Resource link, the Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx tab is displayed. See Figure 4-20.

• PST - Specifies the primary state of the module.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewTree area


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• SST - Specifies the secondary state of the module.• Provisioned - Specifies the code of the module. It is also shown in the tree.• Actual - Specifies the Physically equipped module type.

Access a moduleTree area


4-31

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access a module

Description

Select a Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx in the tree area as shown in Figure 4-20. The client area displays the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-21.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-20 Accessing a module (e.g. 10XANY)

Figure 4-21 SFP module

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module x tab displays the Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module x and Alarms panels and a table. The panel contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - Specifies the equipment Access Identifier, identifies the

equipment entity access identifier.



4-33

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the Provisioned module type. ANY-<type> is the value for a generic MSA XFP/SFP module. It is also shown in the tree. The values are:– SI-11 Intra office STM-1 (wl1310) B&W for STM-1 port– SS-11 Short Haul STM-1 (wl1310) B&W for STM-1 port– SL-11 Long Haul STM-1 (wl1310) B&W for STM-1 port– SL-12 Long Haul STM-1 (wl1550) B&W for STM-1 port– SS-41 Short Haul STM-4 (wl1310) B&W for STM-4 port– SL-41 Long Haul STM-4 (wl1310) B&W for STM-4 port– SL-42 Long Haul STM-4 (wl1550) B&W for STM-4 port– SS-161AR Short Haul STM-16 (wl1310) B&W AnyRate (Max Rate STM-16)

port– SI-161 Intraoffice STM-16 (wl1310) B&W for STM-16 port– SS-161 Short Haul STM-16 (wl1310) B&W for STM-16 port– SS-162 Short Haul STM-16 (wl1550) B&W for STM-16 port– SL-161 Long Haul STM-16 (wl1310) B&W for STM-16 port– SL-162 Long Haul STM-16 (wl1550) B&W for STM-16 port– XI-641 Intraoffice STM-64 (wl1310) B&W for STM-64 port– XI-642 Intraoffice STM-64 (wl1550) B&W for STM-64 port– XI-643 Intraoffice STM-64 (3) B&W for STM-64 port– XI-645 Intraoffice STM-64 (5) B&W for STM-64 port– XS-641 Short Haul STM-64 (wl1310) B&W for STM-64 port– XS-642 Short Haul STM-64 (wl1550) B&W for STM-64 port– XS-643 Short Haul STM-64 (3)B&W for STM-64 port– XS-645 Short Haul STM-64 (5) B&W for STM-64 port– XL-641 Long Haul STM-64 (wl1310) B&W for STM-64 port– XL-642 Long Haul STM-64 (wl1550) B&W for STM-64 port

This is applicable to P1L1-2D2 XFP-E module– XL-643 Long Haul STM-64 (3)B&W for STM-64 port– XV-642 Very Long Haul STM-64(2) B&W for STM-64 port– XV-643 Very Long Haul STM-64(3) B&W for STM-64 port– XP1L12D2 XFP G.959.1 Long Haul (wl1550) – STM-64/OC-192 (5) B&W – SS162C CWDM SFP STM-16/OC-48 Short haul – SL162C CWDM SFP STM-16/OC-48 Long haul – XL-642C DWDM XFP STM-64/OC-192 Long haul– ANY-OC3 Generic MSA SFP module (STM1 case)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– ANY-OC12 Generic MSA SFP module (STM4 case)– ANY-OC48 Generic MSA SFP module (STM16 case)– ANY-OC192 Generic MSA XFP module (STM64 case)– ANY-DATAS Generic MSA SFP module (Ethernet GBE case)– ANY-DATAX Generic MSA XFP module (Ethernet 10GBE case)

• Actual Type - Specifies the Physically equipped module type (see Current Provisioned Type).

• Primary/secondary state - Specifies the primary and secondary service state.• Primary State - To change the primary state to which the unit is set. The choices are:

– IS: In Service - The module is providing service– OOS-AU Out of Service, Autonomous - The module is out of service due to an

autonomous event.– OOS-MA Out of Service, Management - The module is out of service due to

management action.– OOS-AUMA Out of Service, Autonomous and Management - The module is out

of service both due to an autonomous event and management action.• Automatic In Service Mode - To change the Automatic in service mode to which the

unit is set. The choices are:– NOWAIT - A condition notifies the module is unplugged– AINS - No condition is sent due to module unplugged

• Auto-Provisioning - Specifies the Auto provisioning parameter is used to manage the Autoprovisioning functionality in case of global (Shelf/NE level) restart: its main purpose is to prevent the autoprovisioning of a Card (after a restart) in a slot position in which it has been logically deleted. It cannot be provisioned, it is managed only by the NE but can be retrieved. The choices are:– ON - Autoprovisioning Allowed in that slot position– OFF - Autoprovisioning Not-Allowed in that slot position

• Command Mode - To change the status of the unit. The values are:– NORM (Normal)– FRCD (Forced)

• Alarm Profile - Specifies the label of the ASAP that is in used for the unit. Click Select hyperlink to select a different profile.

The Alarm panel contains the View hyperlink that allows to show all the actual alarm.

Access a resourceTree area


4-35

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Access a resource

Figure 4-22 Access a resource (e.g. 10XANY)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx > Port xx tab displays the following tabs: • OC/GBE



4-37

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• PM• PROTECTION• STS• List STS

OC/GBE functional tab

The OC/GBE functional tab is made up of four panels:• Optical Carrier Modify• Section Trace• Loopback• Alarm

• Optical Carrier Modify

It allows to change the settings of the resource by means of the following parameters:• Access Identifier: It specifies the identifier of the unit resource. It is also shown in

the tree.• Automatic In Service Threshold: The combo-boxes allow to set the duration of

an alarm-free signal, in HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time duration in hours and value MM indicates the time duration in minutes. The default value is 08-00.

• Automatic In Service Timer: It specifies the duration of an alarm-free signal, in HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time duration in hours and value MM indicates the time duration in minutes.

• S1 Transmitted: It determines if the transmitted S1 byte of the specified OCn will have the "DUS" message or will have the actual traceability of the signal. The allowable choice is: DUS (Don’t USe), the S1 byte is set to "DON’T USE for Synchronization" message.

• ALS Enabled: The combo-box allows to set if the laser will be shut down on the occurrence of an LOS on the receive side. If a shutdown occurs, the IO module will periodically transmit pulses to attempt to restart the circuit. When ALS is disabled, the laser will remain on. If the ALS state is changed from enable to disable while the laser is shut down, laser power will be unconditionally restored. The allowable choices are: Y (ALS Enable) or N (ALS Disable).

• Signal Degrade Threshold: The combo-box allows to specify the BER threshold for declaring an SDBER signal degrade condition. This also determines the bit error rate at which Signal Degrade line protection switching is initiated. The allowable choices are: from 5 to 9 it indicates 1 bit error in 10n bits, where n is the entered value. Default value: 6.

• Signal Failure Threshold: The combo-box allows to specify the BER threshold for declaring an EBER signal fail condition. This also determines the bit error rate at which Signal Fail line protection switching is initiated (if FFP protected). The allowable choices are: from 3 to 5 it indicates 1 bit error in 10n bits, where n is the entered value. Default value: 4.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Trace message: The entry box allows to digit the outgoing section trace message, enclosed in quotation marks. If no characters is entered, then the transmitted section trace message in the J0 byte is 01 hexadecimal.

• Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Name: The entry box allows to digit the label of the ASAP that is used for the unit. Clicking on the Select hyperlink it is possible to select a different profile.

• Command Execution Mode: The combo-box allows to select the command execution mode. The allowable choices are: FRCD = Forced or NORM = Normal.

• Current Primary state: It specifies the primary state to which the facility is set.• Primary State: The combo-box allows to change the primary state to which the

unit is set. The allowable choices are: IS = In Service and OOS= Out Of Service.• Current Secondary state: It specifies the secondary state to which the facility is

set.• Secondary State: The combo-box allows to change the secondary state to which

the unit is set. The allowable choices are: SGEO = Supporting Entity Outage or TS = Test.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Delete restarts the page without considering the previous actions.– Save which applies the previous selections and restart with new selection– Remove which causes the specified facility client/line to be placed in an out-of-

service (OOSMA or OOS-AUMA) state for maintenance purposes.• Section Trace


the tree.• Incoming Message Format: The combo-box allows to set the format in which to

display the incoming trace message. The allowable choices are: TEXT = text format or HEX = hexadecimal format. The default value is TEXT.

• The panel has the Retrieve Section Trace hyperlink by means of which it is possible to retrieve the contents of the SONET Section Trace message, a 15 character ASCII message. This command may be used to retrieve the "incoming" Section Trace, or the "outgoing" Section Trace message that is inserted into the Section overhead on the outgoing signal.

• Loopback


the tree.• Location: The combo-box allows to chose the location in which the loopback is

performed. The allowable choices are: NEND = Near End. The default value is NEND.

• Loopback Type: The combo-boxes allow to specify the type of loopback. The allowable choices (according the resource type) are:



4-39

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– FACILITY = loopback at the receive side (from the network) to the transmit side (to the network) of the specified facility.

– TERMINAL = loopback where the signal that is about to be transmitted is connected to the associated incoming receiver .

The default value is FACILITY. The panel has the Operate loopback hyperlink by means of which it is possible to establish a near-end facility or terminal loopback on the specified resource facility. To execute it, the specified resource must have a Primary State of OOS-AUMA or OOS-MA and not have an Secondary State of LPBK (i.e. it is not already in a loopback).• Alarm

The Alarm panel contains the View hyperlink which allows to show all the actual alarm.

PM functional tab

The PM functional tab is made up of three sub-functional tabs:• PM Report• PM Init Register• PM Mode

The PM Report sub-functional tab

Figure 4-23 PM Report

It allows to retrieve the current and/or historical 15-minute and/or 1-day PM data corresponding to the PM data collection register(s) selected for the specified facility. For each monitored parameter, the current and/or up to thirty-two (32) 15-minute historical

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PM registers, or the current and/or up to seven (7) 1-day historical PM registers or both 15-minute and 1-day PM registers can be retrieved.The page shows the following parameters:

• Access Identifier: The entry box specifies the identifier of the unit resource. It is also shown in the tree.

– Monitor Level: The combo-box allows to set the discrimination level of PM parameter values to be reported for the specified Monitored Parameter Type. The allowable choices are:

– Down: Only PM data for the specified MONTYPE that is less-than or equal-to ( < ) the value of < LEVEL> is reported.

– Down Or Not Complete: Only PM data for the specified MONTYPE that is < the value of <LEVEL> or that does not have a VLDTY flag of CMPL.

– Up: Only PM data for the specified MONTYPE that is greater-than or equal-to ( > ) the value of < LEVEL> is reported.

– Up Or Not Complete: Only PM data for the specified MONTYPE that is > the value of <LEVEL> or that does not have a VLDTY flag of CMPL.

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value UP.• Location: The combo-box allows to specify whether PM registers for near-end

and/or far-end PM monitoring are to be reported. The allowable choices are:– Near End– Far End– All

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Monitored Parameter Type: The combo-box allows to specifies the type of

monitored parameter whose PM data registers are being retrieved. The allowable choices are:

– Code Violations - Section (CVS)– Errored Seconds - Section (ESS)– Severely Errored Seconds - Section (SESS )– Severely Errored Frame Seconds - Section (SEFSS)– Unavailable Seconds - Section (UASS)– Code Violations - Line (CVL)– Errored Seconds - Line (ESL)– Severely Errored Seconds - Line (SESL)– Unavailable Seconds - line (UASL)– Failure Counts - Line (FCL)– Protection Switching Counts - Line (PSCL)– Protection Switching Duration - Line (PSDL)– All monitored types- (ALL)



4-41

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Direction: The combo-box allows to specifies the direction of the signal being

monitored (receive or transmit). Only the value (receive) is supported.

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value receive.• Time Period: The combo-box allows to specifies the accumulation time period for

the retrieved performance monitoring information. The allowable choices are:– 15-MIN– 1-DAY– BOTH

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value 15-MIN.• Number of 15-minute: The combo-box allows to set the number of 15-minute

historical registers, specifies the number of previous 15-minute historical PM registers to retrieve in addition to that specified by Monitor Date and Monitor Time. The register specified by these parameters will be the first output followed by the Number of 15-minute previous registers. The allowable choices are:

– from 0 to 32 previous historical 15-minute PM data registers– ALL All previous historical 15-minute PM data registers

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value 0.• Number of 1-day: The combo-box allows to set the number of 1-day historical

registers, specifies the number of previous 1-day historical PM registers to retrieve in addition to that specified by Monitor Date and Monitor Time. The register specified by these parameters will be the first output followed by the Number of 1-day previous registers. The allowable choices are:– from 0 to 7 previous historical 1-day PM data registers– ALL All previous historical 1-day PM data registers

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value 0.• Monitor Date: The combo-boxes allow to set the starting date of the PM

collection period for which PM data is to be reported. The allowable choices are:– Month from 01 to 12– Day from 01 to 31

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value current date.• Monitor Time: The combo-boxes allow to set the starting time of the PM

collection period for which PM data is to be reported. The allowable choices are:– Hour from 00 to 23– Minute from 00 to 59

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value current hour and beginning of the current 15-minute window.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The PM Init Registration sub-functional tab

Figure 4-24 PM Init Register

It allows to initialize the current 15-Minute or current 1-Day (specified by Time Period) PM collection registers for the near- or far-end side (specified by Location) pertaining to the specified port to the value zero.

The page shows the following parameters:• Access Identifier: The entry box specifies the identifier of the unit resource. It is

also shown in the tree.• Monitor Value: The combo-box allows to set specifies the value to be set in the

register specified by Location and Time Period. Only the value 0 is supported.• Location: The combo-box allows to specify the PM registers location to be

initialized. The allowable choices are:– Near End– Far End– ALL

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Monitored Parameter Type: The combo-box allows to specifies the type of

monitored parameter whose PM data registers are being retrieved. Only the default value ALL (All monitored types) is supported.

• Direction: The combo-box allows to specify the direction of the signal being monitored (receive or transmit). Only the default value RCV (receive) is supported.

• Time Period: The combo-box allows to specifies whether the 15-minute or 1-day (24 hour) PM collection register is to be initialized. The allowable choices are:

– 15-MIN– 1-DAY

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value 15-MIN.



4-43

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The panel has the Save hyperlink by means of which it is possible to store the settings.

The PM Mode sub-functional tab

Figure 4-25 PM Mode

The PM Mode sub-functional tab contains two panels.

The Set Performance Monitoring Mode page allows to set the mode of PM data collection for the specified facility by:


• Location: The combo-box allows to specify the PM registers location to be initialized. The allowable choices are:

– Near End– Far End– ALL

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Mode Type: The entry box specifies the PM mode type to be enabled or disabled.

The allowable choices are:– ALL PM for all applicable parameters is configured– S PM for Section parameters is configured– L PM for Line parameters is configured

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– O PM for Optical analog parameters is configured (only for OC-192)

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Direction: (only for OC-192 port) The combo-box allows to specify the direction

of the signal being monitored. The allowable choices are:– ALL– RCV Receive direction for OT port– TRMT Transmit direction for OT port (egress signal monitoring)• PM State: The combo-box allows to set whether the PM data collection for the

specified mode type is enabled or disabled. The allowable choices are:– ON PM for the specified Mode Type is enabled– OFF PM for the specified Mode Type is disabled.

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ON.

The panel has the Save hyperlink by means of which it is possible to store the settings.

The Retrieve Performance Monitoring Mode page allows to retrieve the mode of PM data collection for the specified facility by:


• Location: The combo-box allows to specify the PM registers location to be initialized. The allowable choices are:

– Near End– Far End– All

Clicking on the Default hyperlink it is possible to set the default value ALL.• Direction: (only for OC-192 port) The combo-box allows to specific the direction

of the signal being monitored. The allowable choices are:– ALL– RCV Receive direction for OT port– TRMT Transmit direction for OT port (egress signal monitoring)

PROTECTION functional tab

The PROTECTION functional tab is made up of two panels:• Port Panel• UPSR Panel

The PROTECTION tab displays the following functional tabs as shown in Figure 4-26.



4-45

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-26 The PROTECTION tab

The Port Panel has the below choices:• Port Access Identifier: It specifies the identifier of the port resource. It is also

shown in the tree.• Port Primary/Secondary State: It specifies the primary and secondary service

state of the port.

The UPSR Panel has the below choices:• FFP AID• Protected• Protecting

This Panel has Delete UPSR hyperlink to delete the UPSR.

STS functional tab

The STS functional tab is made up of the Specify an STS panel which allows to set an access identifier.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-27 STS tab

The Specify an STS panel contains three combo-boxes that are used to edit the Access Identifier:

• The first combo-box allows to select the tributary signal that is embedded in the aggregate signal i.e., OCnSTSm (where n = 12, 48, 192 and m = 1, 3C, 12C, 48C).

• A string of 4 numbers shows the physical position in this order: rack - shelf - slot - module

• The second and third combo-boxes allow to set the physical port.

The panel has the Continue hyperlink which applies the previous selections and restart with new selection.



4-47

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

List STS functional tab

Figure 4-28 List STS tab

The List STS functional tab is made up of a table which allows to manage the concatenation. The table contains five columns:

• Concatenation: The check boxes allow to set the type of payload in an STS payload envelope. Validating it means that the relevant signal is involved in the concatenation.

• Resource: It specifies the selected STS facility to which the command is directed. When the item is greyed, it is not provided.

• Facility: This item complies the provision status of the port. If it is greyed the label is Provisioned and clicking on it the procedure for the facility provision starts.

• Connections• Performance Monitoring

Click on Provision under the Facility option for the provisioning of STSn and the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-29 Provisioning of STSn

On the upper left corner, the panel has the following hyperlinks:– Provision is joined with the check boxes that are available for each resource.

Validating it means that you want to proceed for the facility provision. – DELETE which applies the deletion of all the previous selections (only greyed

facility can be deleted).



4-49

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DATA Unit

Figure 4-30 Accessing a resource (e.g. PP20G ETS port)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx > Port xx tab page presents five functional tabs:• PHYSICAL• BRIDGE• Configure IGMP• IGMP Properties• PM DATA



4-51

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PHYSICAL functional tab (for Ethernet Transparent System)

The PHYSICAL functional tab is made up of five panels:• State panel

It allows to change the settings of the resource by means of the following parameters:• Admin state: The combo-box allows to set the administrative state. The allowable

choices are: up = active state or down = not active state.• Last change: The text field shows the date and time when the resource had been

managed last time.• Operational state: The text field shows the actual state of the resource.• MAU Operational state: The text field shows the actual state of the Medium

Access Unit (MAU).• Alarm Severity Profile: The text field shows the ASAP label that is in use for the

resource.

The panel has the Save hyperlink which applies the previous selections and restart with new selection.• Loopback panel

It shows the settings of the loopback resource:• Line loopback: It shows the from DTE back to DTE loopback status. The

allowable values are enabled or disabled.• Internal loopback: It shows the from Remote Port-Rx back to Remote Port-Tx

loopback status.

The allowable values are: enabled (the enabling is available only in case of P2P = Point-to-Point Connection) or disabled.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Create line loopback– Create internal loopback

• Ethernet port panel

It allows to change the settings of the resource by means of the following parameters:• Connector present: The text field indicates if the interface has a physical

connector. The allowable values are: true or false.• Type: The text field indicates the type of port (fixed to “ethernetCsmacd"). The

values fixed: ethernetCsmacd.• Speed: The text field indicates the actual configured rate. The allowable values

are: 1000000 (1Gb/s) or 10000000 (10 Gb/s).• Alias: The entry field indicates the friendly name for the interface, settable by the

user.• Encapsulation mode: The text field indicates the method of MAC packets

encapsulation inside the underlying physical layer. The allowable values are: ethernetV2 (default) or IEEE8023.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Maximum MTU/MRU: The entry field indicates the Maximum Transmit Unit/Maximum Receive Unit size of the largest packet which can be sent/received on the interface, specified in octets. The allowable value ranges from 1574 to 9216. In case of Provider Bridge, for ETB ports, the following values are allowed: from 1600 to 9242.

• Promiscuous mode: The text field indicates indicating whether this interface has to inspect the packets' MAC addresses. The allowable values are: true or false.

• FCS discard errored frame: The text field indicates the insertion or removal of GFP-FCS (Frame Check Sequence) field into the optional field pFCS of the GFP frame. The allowable values are: true or false.

• Client type: The text field indicates the transported layer. The allowable values are: ets (for Ethernet Transparent System), etb (for Ethernet Bridge System) or LinkAgg (for Link Aggregation System).

• Default PAUSE behavior: The combo-box allows to chose the pause signal that is inserted for Flow Control signalling. It applies only in the case that the “AutoNegotiation-AdminStatus" is in “disabled". The allowable choices are:

– disabled to disable the Flow Control function– asymmetric to enable the Flow Control function, in asymmetric mode (i.e. it can

transmit Pause Frames, but ignores incoming Pause Frames)– symmetric to enable the Flow Control function, in symmetric mode (i.e. it can

transmit and receive Pause Frames)• Adm. fractional rate: The entry field indicates the possible Fractional Rates, at

the relevant payload capacity:– if STS-3c SPE/VC4, the possibilities are: “Fractional 100,000,000 kb/s SONET

Rate” or “No Rate Limit”– if STS-1 SPE/VC3 (not yet available), the possibilities are: “Fractional 10,000,000

kb/s SONET Rate” or “No Rate Limit”– if VT 2 SPE/VC12 (not yet available)• Underlie layer: The text field indicates the associated layer. The allowable values

are: mau (for Ethernet Transparent System), vconc (virtual concatenation to permit the setting of the “virtual concatenation granularity" mode) or sonet (to permit the setting of the “Rate-Limiting" mode. NOTE: this value is given only in the case that the concatenation number for the VC4 is equal to 1).

• Link up/down trap: The text field indicates whether linkUp / linkDown traps (notification upon the changing of the node operational state from up to down and vice versa) should be generated for this interface. possible options: enabled / disabled the associated layer. The allowable values are: enabled or disabled.

• MAU panelIt allows to change the settings of the resource by means of the following parameters:• MAU identifier: The text field shows a number assigned by the system. The

allowable value is: 1.



4-53

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Front Panel Port: The text field shows a number assigned by the system; it is the identifier of the physical port on the front of the PIM. The allowable value is: <8 digit number>.

• State: The text field shows the MAU current status. The allowable values are: operational or shutdown.

• Jack Type List: The text field shows the available connectors type. The allowable values are: RJ45 for FE port or fiberLC for GbE port.

• Jabber state: The text field shows the state of the jabber process (checking about abnormal data transmissions longer than the max permissible packet length).

• Default Type: The text field shows the type of physical I/F. The allowable values are:

– 10BaseTFD for E-10Mbps LAN (FD= FullDuplex)– 100BaseTXFD for FE-100Mbps LAN– 1000BaseXFD for 1GE (1000Mbps) LAN– b10GBaseR for 10GE (10000Mbps) LAN• RemoteClientFail cons. actions: The combo-box allows to chose one of the

following options:– disabled– shutdown

If shutdown is selected, then the Tx i/f (towards the Ethernet line) of this Local Port will be set in shutDown state, in case of InternalLoopBack on this port, or in case of CSF alarm detection on the remote port connected to this port.

– Symmetric to enable the Flow Control function, in symmetric mode (i.e. it can transmit and receive Pause Frames)

• Auto-negotiation supported: The text field indicates if the auto-negotiation is supported or not. The allowable values are: true or false.

• Auto-negotiation enabled: The text field indicates if the auto-negotiation is enabled or not. The allowable values are: enabled or disabled.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save in order to save the settings.– Enable autonegotiation in order to change the last described field without using

other page command.• Flow management panel

It allows to change the settings of the resource by means of the following parameters:• VLAN protocol profile: The combo-box allows to chose one of the existing

VLAN Profile or setting don’t care.• Layer2 control frame (0x): The entry field permits to enable or disable the

Protocol Frames that can accede to this port. The allowable value can be selected by means of the Bitmask details hyperlink.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BRIDGE functional tab

Figure 4-31 BRIDGE functional tab

The BRIDGE functional tab displays the following two panels:• Bridge Port Management: Displays the below options.

– Bridge Port Name– Port VLAN Identifier – Ingress Filtering– Acceptable Frame Type

• QoS: Displays the below options.– Default User Priority – Regeneration User PriorityBoth the panels have the Save hyperlink to save the settings.



4-55

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure IGMP functional tab

Figure 4-32 Configure IGMP

The Configure IGMP functional tab displays IGMP Configuration panel which has the following parameters:• Port ID: The entry box shows a number assigned by the system; it is the identifier of

the physical port on the front of the PIM. The allowable value is: <8 digit number>.• Port Label: The entry box specifies the label of the resource. It is also shown in the

tree.• VLAN ID: It permits to choose the VLAN to be associated to the IGMP instance.

Clicking on the Select hyperlink the relevant procedure starts.

In order to “bind” a VLAN-IGMP to the selected Port (i.e. using the Port for IGMP Multicast traffic), and to set the IGMP parameters for the Port, the panel presents these options:• Fast Leave Section - Fast Leave Per Port: Possible values:

• enabled means that this Port permits the FastLeave, i.e. the removal of the Multicast traffic on this Port, upon receiving a single “Leave Report” from a user connected on this Port.Note: This type of Leave procedure is advisable to be used when only one single user is connected behind the selected VLAN on that port.

• disabled means that this Port does not permit the FastLeave procedure. In this case the Router has to send some queries in order to check if other members of the IGMP group registered on this Port are interested in the Multicast transmission.

• Static Router Section - Static Router Per Port: Possible values:• enabled means that this Port is statically connected to the IP Multicast Router.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• disabled means that this one is not the Port towards the IP Multicast Router.Note: This association is performed for one VLAN at a time; if more VLAN’s are to be associated to IGMP by means of this port, the operation must be repeated for each VLAN.The panel has the Save & Exit hyperlink in order to save the settings and leave the page.

IGMP Properties functional tab

Figure 4-33 IGMP Properties

The IGMP Properties functional tab displays the IGMP Properties panel which consists of the following items:• Port ID - Displays the port ID.• Port Name - Displays the port name.• From: To: - Displays a range from 1 to 50.

The panel has the Search hyperlink to start the searching procedure.

PHYSICAL functional tab (for Ethernet Bridge System)

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx > Port xx tab page presents the PHYSICAL functional tab.

The PHYSICAL functional tab is made up of seven panels:• State panel

It has the same parameters previously described.• Loopback panel

It has the same parameters previously described.• Ethernet port panel



4-57

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

It has the same parameters previously described, except for the added field:• Bridge base port: The allowable values are: 0 or false.

• MAU panel

It has the same parameters previously described.• Flow management panel

It has the same parameters previously described.• Aggregation Port panel

It allows to configure the LAG (Link Aggregation). Clicking on the Configure LAG hyperlink the relevant procedure starts.• VLAN Info panel

It allows to open the VLAN page in order to evaluate its settings. Clicking on the Show hyperlink the relevant procedure starts.

In the lower part of the page there is the PERFORMANCES field where are present both the retrieve current data hyperlink and the current data and time. The hyperlink allows to show the current data of the Performance Monitoring.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DWDM circuit pack

Figure 4-34 Accessing a resource - 1 (e.g. 11GBAR port)

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx tab displays the following panels as shown in Figure 4-34. • UP > Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx panel• Restart panel• Alarm panel• DWDM Line Selector panel

UP > Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx panel

This panel displays the following parameters:



4-59

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Access Identifier - It is the Equipment Access Identifier, identifies the equipment entity access identifier of the circuit pack resource in the <circuit pack acronym>- <rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format. It is also shown in the tree. They can be:

• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the acronym of the circuit pack resource. It is the Alcatel-Lucent mnemonic stored in the Remote Inventory EPROM for the given equipment. ANY-<type> is the value shows for a generic non Alcatel-Lucent XFP/SFP module.

• Actual Type - Specifies the acronym of the physically equipped module type (Remote Inventory data). ANY-<type> is the value shows for a generic non Alcatel-Lucent XFP/SFP module.

LDRXA-{1-7}-{1-9}-{5, 9, 15, 19}LDRXB-{1-7}-{1-9}-{5, 9, 15, 19}LDTXA-{1-7}-{1-9}-{4, 8, 14, 18}LDTXB-{1-7}-{1-9}-{4, 8, 14, 18}WR4-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2,6,12,16}WR8-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2,6,12,16}11GBAR-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}11GUAR-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}OPS-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}XFP-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-1

LDRXA Circuit PackLDRXB Circuit PackLDTXA Circuit PackLDTXB Circuit PackWR4 Circuit PackWR8 Circuit PackOT 11G Bidir Circuit Pack

OT 11G Unidir Circuit Pack

OPS Circuit PackXFP on DWDM modules

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Primary/secondary state - Specifies primary and the secondary service state. Valid for all modules except TBUS (it has only IS and OOS-AU) and Shelf (it has only IS



4-61

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

and OOS-AUMA). The values are:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Primary State Secondary State

• IS: In Service - The module is providing service

• OOS-AU Out of Service, Autonomous - the module is out of service due to an autonomous event

• OOS-MA Out of Service, Management - the module is out of service due to management action

• OOS-AUMA Out of Service, Autonomous and Management - the module is out of service both due to an autonomous event and management action.

• AINS Autonomous in service - The module is in the AINS state and will become in service when plugged in.

• FLT Fault - The module has a Hardware Failure condition

• MEA Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes - An incompatible module is physically present in a provisioned slot

• PSI Protection Switching Inhibited, by operator command

• SGEO Supporting Entity Outage - reported for an XFP, SFP or PIM module if the supporting IO card is in a OOS primary state

• SDEE Supported Entities Existing - Reported for IOC, PIM, SFP and XFP modules that directly supports provisioned Facilities reported for all the IOCs modules that don't support directly any Facilities but that hosts provisioned Equipment entities that support directly provisioned Facilities

• STBYC Standby-Cold - the module is to back up another module, but is not synchronized with the backed-up module. A module with a cold standby status will not be immediately able to take over the role of the backed-up module, and will require some initialization activity

• STBYH Standby-Hot - the module is to back-up another entity and is normally synchronized with the backed-up module. When In-Service, a module with a hot standby status will be immediately able to take over the role of the backed-up module without the need for initialization activity

• STBYH state will be maintained even when the entity is OOS. Mutually exclusive with WRK and STBYC

• SWDL Software Download - the module is out of service because it is in the process of acquiring, loading, and/or initializing its software

• UAS Unassigned. No equipment is provisioned in the addressed position

• UEQ Unequipped - there is no module in the addressed position

• WRK Working - the module is currently active and if able, providing service. Mutually exclusive with STBYH or STBYC



4-63

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Primary state - To change the primary service state previously referred and described.

• Automatic In Service Mode - To set the Automatic in service mode to which the equipment is set. The choices are:– NOWAIT - A condition notifies the module is unplugged– AINS - No condition is sent due to module unplugged

• Auto-Provisioning - Specifies the Auto provisioning parameter is used to manage the Autoprovisioning functionality in case of global (Shelf/NE level) restart: its main purpose is to prevent the autoprovisioning of a Card (after a restart) in a slot position in which it has been Logically Deleted. It cannot be provisioned, it is managed only by the NE but can be retrieved. The choices are:– ON - Autoprovisioning Allowed in that slot position.– OFF - Autoprovisioning Not-Allowed in that slot position.

• Command Mode - To change the status of the unit. The choices are:– NORM (normal) – FRCD (forced)

• Alarm Profile - Specifies the Alarm Severity Assignment profile (ASAP) name to use with this equipment entity. <userlabel> 1-40 alphanumeric characters (plus '-') assigned as the userlabel for the desired profile. Click Select hyperlink to select a different profile.


Save - That applies the selections and restart with new selection.

Remove - Causes the specified equipment to be placed in the out-of-service management service state.

Remote Inventory - Causes the Remote Inventory (for e.g. XFP module) window opening for the specified physical entity.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The Remote Inventory window contains the following parameters:• Access Identifier - This is the Equipment Access Identifier, identifies the equipment

entity access identifier of the circuit pack resource in the <circuit pack acronym>- <rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format.

• Actual EQPT - Specifies the acronym of the physically equipped module type. ANY-<type> is the value shows for a generic non Alcatel-Lucent XFP/SFP module.

• Company - Specifies the identifier of the board manufacturer. in the <value> <4 bytes> format.

• Mnemonic - Specifies the Alcatel-Lucent mnemonic for the given equipment, in the <value> {<8 Bytes>} format. For many circuit packs the AID Prefix value, the PROVISIONED TYPE value and the Remote Inventory Mnemonic value are identical. This is not so for the circuit packs whose provisioning and inventory data specifications are given in CLEI code field.

• CLEI Code - Specifies the CLEI code for the given equipment, in the <value> {<10 Bytes>} format.

• Part Number - Specifies the Alcatel-Lucent part number for the given equipment, in the <value> {<14 Bytes>} format.

• Software Part Number - Specifies the Alcatel-Lucent part number for the software running on the given equipment, in the <value> {<14 Bytes>} format

• Factory - Specifies the identifier of the factory manufacturer, in the <value> {<4 Bytes>} format.

• Serial Number - Specifies the serial number for the given equipment, in the <value> {<16 Bytes>} format.

• Date - Specifies the date the EPROM was written, in the <value> {{00-99}-{01-12}-{01-31}} format.

• Extra Data - Specifies the ASCII dump of the rest of the bytes in the RI, in the <String collecting the remaining characters, excluding checksum bytes, with blanks replacing non-printable ones> {<46 Bytes>} format.

DWDM circuit pack module

Expand the circuit pack in the tree area as shown in Figure 4-35.



4-65

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-35 Accessing a module - 1 (e.g. XFP)

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx tab displays the following panels: • UP > Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx panel• Alarm panel• DWDM Rate Selector panel

UP > Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx panel

This panel displays the following parameters:• Access Identifier - This is the Equipment Access Identifier, identifies the equipment

entity access identifier of the circuit pack resource in the <circuit pack acronym>- <rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format.

• Current Provisioned Type - Specifies the acronym of the circuit pack resource. It is the Alcatel-Lucent mnemonic stored in the Remote Inventory EPROM for the given equipment. ANY-<type> is the value shows for a generic non Alcatel-Lucent XFP/SFP module.

• Actual Type - Specifies the acronym of the physically equipped module type (Remote Inventory data). ANY-<type> is the value shows for a generic non Alcatel-Lucent XFP/SFP module.

• Primary/secondary state - Specifies primary and the secondary service state. Valid for all modules except TBUS (it has only IS and OOS-AU) and Shelf (it has only IS and OOS-AUMA). The values are previously described in on page 58:

• Primary state - To change the primary service state previously referred and described.

• Automatic In Service Mode - To set the Automatic in service mode to which the equipment is set. The choices are:– NOWAIT - A condition notifies the module is unplugged

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– AINS - No condition is sent due to module unplugged • Auto-Provisioning - Specifies the Auto provisioning parameter is used to manage the

Autoprovisioning functionality in case of global (Shelf/NE level) restart: its main purpose is to prevent the autoprovisioning of a Card (after a restart) in a slot position in which it has been Logically Deleted. It cannot be provisioned, it is managed only by the NE but can be retrieved. The choices are:– ON - Autoprovisioning Allowed in that slot position– OFF - Autoprovisioning Not-Allowed in that slot position

• Command Mode - To change the status of the unit. The choices are:– NORM (normal) – FRCD (forced).

• Alarm Profile: Specifies the Alarm Severity Assignment profile (ASAP) name to use with this equipment entity. <userlabel> 1-40 alphanumeric characters (plus '-') assigned as the userlabel for the desired profile. Click Select hyperlink select a different profile.


Save - Applies the selections and restart with new selection

Remove - Causes the specified equipment to be placed in the out-of-service management service state.

Remote Inventory - Causes the Remote Inventory window opening for the specified physical entity (refer to Table , “UP > Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx panel” (p. 4-58)).

Alarm panel

This panel contains the View hyperlink that retrieves the current status of any reported alarm conditions for the specified port and any alarm conditions matching the specified combination of position-defined input parameters, with the following information:• Raise/Clear Time - Identifies the time when the event is occurred and/or cleared.• AID Access Identifier - Specifies the facility in the <circuit pack acronym>- <rack>-

<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format.• NTFCNCDE Notification Code - Identifies the type of alarm generated by the system

upon occurrence of the event identified by the CONDTYPE. The values are: – CR Critical alarm– MJ Major alarm– MN Minor alarm

• SRVEFF Service Effect - Identifies the effect on service caused by the event. The values are: – NSA Non service-affecting– SA Service-affecting

• CONDTYPE Condition Type - Specifies the condition type retrieved. The values are:



4-67

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– ACTLPBK Active Loopback– BDI Backward Defect Indication– LOF Loss of Frame– LOM Loss of Multiframe– LOS-P Loss of Signal PayloadRAID– MAN Manual (Management) Removal– SSF Server Signal Failure– TIM Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch

• LOCN Location - Identifies the location where the condition type is monitored. The values are: – Near End– Far End

• AIDTYPE - Identifies the type of AID for the notification being retrieved.

Figure 4-36 Alarm view window (e.g. XFP module)

DWDM Rate Selector panel

This panel is made up of only one parameter:• Resource Type: It is the maximum rate for the type previously selected.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Modify – Select Line

Modify a DWDM module

Clicking on the Modify hyperlink in the DWDM Rate Selector panel, the page opens. The following page is displayed, clicking Select Line on CLIENT functional tab when you click on the Select Line hyperlink in the DWDM Rate Selector panel.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-37 Modify and OTPORT tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx > Module x tab page presents two functional tabs and four panels in the following a) to d) points described.• OTPORT functional tab

Clicking on the OTPORT functional tab the page depicted in Figure 4-37 is shown where four panels are presented. They are described in the following 1) to 4) points.1. Optical Carrier Modify panel

• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>- <rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format.



4-69

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Automatic In-Service Threshold: It allows to set how long an input signal must be present on the facility without a failure condition before the system transitions the facility into the In-Service state, in HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time duration in hours and value MM indicates the time duration in minutes. The default value is 08-00.This parameter sets also the value of AINSTH for the ODU2 entity.This parameter applies to the client side only.This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module.

• Automatic In-Service Timer: It specifies the duration of an alarm-free signal, in HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time duration in hours and value MM indicates the time duration in minutes.

• Trace Message: Optical channel transmitted Trail Trace Identifier (TTI), Transmit Source Access Point Identifier (TX_SAPI). This parameter determines the Transmit TTI channel content of the Section Monitoring overhead of an OTUk information structure or the Path Monitoring overhead of the OTUkP information structure. The Trail Trace Identifier shall follow the format defined in ITU-T G.709, Clause 15.2. A TX_SAPI of less than 15 characters is padded out to the right to 15 unprintable characters (e.g., whose hex representation is 0x00). 15 ASCII characters, enclosed in quotation marks. The coded representation is the 7 bit hex representation as specified by the ITU-T Recommendation T.50 (09/92) International Reference Alphabet.

• Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Name: It specifies the ASAP name, in <userlabel> format. Clicking on the Select hyperlink it is possible to start the selection procedure.

• Threshold Crossing Alert Profile Name: It specifies the TCA name, in <userlabel> format. Clicking on the Select hyperlink it is possible to start the selection procedure.

• Command Execution Mode: By means of this combo-box it is possible to change the Command Execution Mode. The allowable choices are:

– NORM Normal, the command is denied if the result of its execution is service-affecting.

– FRCD Forced, the command is completed even if the result of its execution is service affecting.

• Current Primary State: It specifies the primary secondary service state. Possible displayed values are previously described in 4.8.2.3.1 on page 288.

• Primary State: By means of this combo-box it is possible to change the primary service state.

• Current Secondary State: It specifies the secondary service state. Possible displayed values are previously described.

• Secondary State: By means of this combo-box it is possible to change the secondary service state.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are not considered and the user

goes back to the previous page.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Delete: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are deleted and the user can restart for new settings.

– Save: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are applied and the user goes back to the previous page.

– Restore: Allows to restore the previous settings.2. Section Trace panel• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>- <rack>-

<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format.• Incoming Message Format: It allows to set the format in which to display the

incoming trace message. Possible choices are:– TEXT Text incoming trace message– HEX Hexadecimal incoming trace message– The default value is TEXT.

The panel has the Retrieve Section Trace hyperlink. Clicking on it, the following window opens.

3. Loopback panel• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>- <rack>-

<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format.• Location: It allows to set the location in which the loopback is performed. Possible

choice is Near End• Loopback Type: It allows to set the type of loopback. Possible choices are

– FACILITY Loopback at the receive side (from the client equipment or a DWDM line) to the transmit side (toward the client equipment or DWDM line) of the specified facility.



4-71

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– TERMINAL Loopback where the signal that is about to be transmitted toward the client is transmitted back toward a DWDM domain. The default value is FACILITY.The panel has the Operate Loopback hyperlink. Clicking on it, the relevant command is generated. When the loopback is done, the link changes in Release Loopback so to perform the reverse operation.

4. Alarm panelThis panel contains the View hyperlink which allows to show all the actual alarm.

• PM functional tabClicking on the PM functional tab the page depicted in the below figure is shown where four functional tabs are presented. They are described in the following 1) to 4) points.

Figure 4-38 PM tab and PM Report for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

1. PM Report functional tabThe PM Report functional tab has the Retrieve Performance Monitoring panel which allows to set the parameters for the current digital PM collection registers for the near-end side pertaining to the specified OTU2 port to the value zero. It contains:• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>-

<rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree.• Monitored Parameter Type: It identifies the parameter whose PM data register is

being initialized. Only all near-end and/or far-end parameters of the current 15 minutes or 1 day register can be initialized. The Default value is ALL.

• Monitor level: It specifies the value to be set in the register specified by Location and Time Period. Only the value 0 is supported. The Default value is 0.

• Location: It specifies the PM registers location to be initialized. The Default value is NEND (near end).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Direction: It specifies the direction of the signal being monitored (receive or transmit). The allowable values are: RCV (receive) or TRMT (transmit) or ALL (both). The Default value is RCV.

• Time Period: It specifies whether the 15-minute or 1-day (24 hour) PM collection register is to be initialized. The allowable values are: 15-MIN (receive) or 1-DAY (transmit). The Default value is 15-MIN.

• Number of 15-minutes: It is the historical registers, specifies the number of previous 15-minute historical PM registers to retrieve in addition to that specified by Monitor Date and Monitor Time. The register specified with Monitor Date and Monitor Time will be the first output followed by this previous registers. Values are:

– 0-32 Number of previous historical 15-minute PM data registers– ALL All previous historical 15-minute PM data registers.The Default value is 0.• Number of 1-days: It is the historical registers, specifies the number of previous

1-day historical PM registers to retrieve in addition to that specified by Monitor Date and Monitor Time. The register specified with Monitor Date and Monitor Time will be the first output followed by this previous registers. Values are:

– 0-7 Number of previous historical 1-day PM data registers– ALL All previous historical 1-day PM data registers.The Default value is 0.• Monitor Date: It specifies the (starting) date of the PM collection period for

which PM data is to be reported. The Default value is the current date.• Monitor Time: If Time Period = 15-MIN, BOTH is entered, specifies the

(starting) time of the PM collection period for which PM data is to be retrieved. If Time Period = 1-DAY is entered, this value is ignored (i.e., an entered value is validated, but does not affect the command execution). The Default value is the current hour and beginning of the current 15-minute window.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user leave the page.– Retrieve: By clicking this hyperlink the user starts the PM data collection.

2. PM Init Register functional tab



4-73

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-39 PM Init Register tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The PM Init Register functional tab has the Initialize Register panel which allows to set the parameters for the PM collection. It contains:• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>-

<rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree.• Monitored Parameter Type: It identifies the parameter whose PM data register is

being initialized. Only all near-end and/or far-end parameters of the current 15 minutes or 1 day register can be initialized. The Default value is ALL.

• Monitor Value: It specifies the value to be set in the register specified by Location and Time Period. Only the value 0 is supported. The Default value is 0.

• Location: It specifies the PM registers location to be initialized. The Default value is NEND (near end).


• Time Period: It specifies whether the 15-minute or 1-day (24 hour) PM collection register is to be initialized. The allowable values are: 15-MIN (receive) or 1-DAY (transmit). The Default value is 15-MIN.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user leave the page.– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user saves the settings.

3. PM Mode functional tab

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-40 PM Mode tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The PM Mode functional tab has the Set Performance Monitoring Mode and Retrieve Performance Monitoring Mode panels which allow to set the parameters for the PM collection. They contain the following parameters:• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>-

<rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree.• Location: It specifies the PM registers location to be initialized. The Default value

is NEND (near end). • Mode Type: It specifies the PM mode type to be enabled or disabled. The

allowable values are: All (PM for all applicable parameters is configured) or S (PM for OTUk Section parameters is configured) or O (PM for Optical analog parameters is configured). The Default value is O.


• PM State: It specifies whether the PM data collection for the specified mode type is enabled or disabled. The allowable values are: ON (PM for the specified MODETYPE is enabled) or OFF (PM for the specified MODETYPE is disabled). The Default value is ON.

The panels have the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user leave the page.– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user saves the settings.– Retrieve: By clicking this hyperlink the user starts the PM data mode.

4. PM Baseline functional tab



4-75

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-41 PM Baseline tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The PM Baseline functional tab has the Set Baseline and Retrieve Baseline panels which allow to set the parameters for the PM collection. They contain the following parameters:• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>-

<rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree.• Monitored parameter type: It specifies the monitored type which will be

baselined. The allowable values are: ALL (All Supported Parameters Baselined) or OPR (Optical Power Received Baselined) or OPT (Optical Power Transmitted Baselined). The Default value is ALL.

• Reason: It defines the reason for baselining. The allowable values are: LOS_CLR (Loss of Signal defect has been cleared) or NEW_SYSTEM (Indicates that the reason for baselining is installation of a new system) or OT_REPLACED (OT pack is being replaced) or 0 - 9 (User configurable code for baselining reason).

The panels have the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user leave the page.– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user saves the settings.– Retrieve: By clicking this hyperlink the user starts the PM data baseline.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Line DWDM

Figure 4-42 Select Line and OTU2 Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The Rack x > Shelf x > Board xx > Module xx tab page presents three panels and three functional tabs in the following 1) to 4) points described.1. Optical Transport Layer Unit 2 - Line Side panel

• Access Identifier: It shows the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>- <rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree. They can be:

• Forward Error Correction: It allows to set the type of Forward Error Correction on a DWDM line and client side port. This parameter applies to client port Access Identifier when the signal type is OTM0_2. The allowable values are:

– NOFEC NO FEC (11GxAR client AID only)

OTPORT-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}-L1OTPORT-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}-C1

OTU2 Line port, on an 11GxAR or OT2TDM moduleClient port on an 11GxAR module -OTU2, OC192, 10GE ,10GFC



4-77

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– EFEC Enhanced FEC (11GxAR line AID only)– RSFEC Reed-Solomon FEC (line and client AID)– EFEC2 Enhanced FEC2 (OT2TDM line port AID only)The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> EFEC initially set by the system for line AID on 11GxAR or <Previously-existing value> RSFEC for client AID on 11GxAR, and line port on OT2TDM. • Operational Mode: It allows to configure the operational mode of the line port

only of an OT. It can only be changed when the client port state is OOS-MA, UAS. It can be set to REGEN when the client signal have been deleted (DLT-rr). This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are:

– ADD_DROP bidirectional mode with a bidirectional signal added and dropped– ADD unidirectional mode with the signal added only– DROP unidirectional mode with the signal dropped only– REGEN regenerator mode with a thru connection.– DROP_REGEN regenerator mode with a thru connection and also a dropped

connection.The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> ADD_DROP by the system.• OTU Rate: It specifies the OTU2 rate (standard 10.709, overclocked 11.049Gb/s,

overclocked 11.096Gb/s). It is set on the client side only when the client signal is OTM0.2 and on the line side only when the Operational Mode is set to REGEN mode. The 10G FC rate of 11.27Gb/s (OTM11.27) is not supported in REGEN mode due to the added propagation delay which will cause login failure on the Fibre Channel. This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are: OTM10.709 or OTM11.049 or OTM11.096. The Default value is: OTM10.709.



• Current Primary State: It specifies the primary secondary service state.• Primary State: By means of this combo-box it is possible to change the primary

service state.• Current Secondary State: It specifies the secondary service state.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are applied and the user goes

back to the previous page.– Restore: Allows to restore the previous settings.– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are not considered and the user

goes back to the previous page.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2. Trail Trace Info panel• Access Identifier: It shows the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>- <rack>-

<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format.• TX_SAPI: Transmit Source Access Point Identifier. This parameter determines

the Transmit TTI channel content of the Section Monitoring overhead of an OTUk information structure or the Path Monitoring overhead of the OTUkP information structure. The allowable values are: 15 ASCII characters, enclosed in quotation marks.

The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> Null character (15 bytes each with hex value 00) initially set by the system for line AID or <Previously-existing value> for client AID.• EXP_SAPI: Expected incoming Source Access Point Identifier (EXP_SAPI).

This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module.The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> Null character (15 bytes each with hex value 00) initially set by the system for line AID or <Previously-existing value> for client AID. OC Trace Comparison: This parameter enables and disables section Trace Identifier MisMatch (TIMM) defect detection (i.e., enables and disables comparison between the actual incoming SAPI (INC_SAPI) and the provisioned expected incoming SAPI (EXP_SAPI). This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are:– ENABLE: Allows to enable compare– DISABLE: Allows to disable compareThe Default value is: <Previously-existing value> DISABLE initially set by the system.• OCP Trace ID mismatch resp: Optical Channel Path Trace Identifier Mismatch

Response. This parameter determines whether an OT will take a Consequent Action (or pass the received optical channel. upon detection of an optical channel path trace mismatch at its input. For the line side, the consequent action is "laser shut off", "insert unframed AIS", or “insert framed AIS" depends on the parameter OC signal defect response. The allowable values are:

– ENABLE: Allows to enable TIMM defect detection– DISABLE: Allows to disable TIMM defect detectionThe Default value is: <Previously-existing value> DISABLE initially set by the system for line AID or <Previously-existing value> for client AID.• OC signal defect response: This parameter determines how an OT which is

sending its output to external equipment will respond to one of the detected defects at its line side input. Namely whether the OT will respond by 1) inserting 128bit unframed AIS (UFAIS), 2) inserting framed AISL/MS-AIS (FAIS), or 3) shutting off the laser(s) (OFF). This parameter apply only to the line side.

This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are:– UFAIS inserting a 128 bit unframed AIS– FAIS inserting framed AIS-L/MS-AIS



4-79

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– LASER_OFF deactivating the transmitterThe Default value is: <Previously-existing value> UFAIS by the system.The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save: By clicking this hyperlink all the operation are applied and the user goes

back to the previous page.– Retrieve: Allows to retrieve the actual settings.

3. Loopback panel• Access Identifier: It identifies the entity access identifier in the <OTPORT>-

<rack>-<shelf>- <slot>-<side> format.• Location: It allows to set the location in which the loopback is performed.

Possible choice is NEND Near End.• Loopback Type: It allows to set the type of loopback. Possible choices are:– FACILITY Loopback at the receive side (from the client equipment or a DWDM

line) to the transmit side (toward the client equipment or DWDM line) of the specified facility.

– TERMINAL Loopback where the signal that is about to be transmitted toward the client is transmitted back toward a DWDM domain.

The default value is FACILITY.

The panel has the Operate Loopback hyperlink. Clicking on it, the relevant command is generated. When the loopback is done, the link changes in Release Loopback so to perform the reverse operation.4. ODU2 LINE functional tab

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-43 ODU2 Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The page contains:1. Optical Data Unit 2 - Line Side panel2. Trail Trace Info panel3. OTU2 LINE functional tab4. ODU2 PM LINE functional tab1. Optical Data Unit 2 - Line Side panel

• Access Identifier: It specifies an access Identifier to the OT client or line port in the <OTPORT>-<rack>-<shelf>-<slot>-<side> format. It is also shown in the tree. They can be:

– OTODU2-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}-{C1, L1}-1 ODU2 facility in an OTU2– OTODU2-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9, 12-19, 21-28, 29-36}-{L1}-1 ODU2 facility in an OTU2 on OT2TDM module

• Mapping Mode: It is the ODUkP to CBRx mapping mode. This parameter indicates the mapping mode that will be used when the client port signal is provisioned to OC192, or 10GbE_WAN using the ENT-OC192 command. This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are:

– BITSYNC bit synchronous CBR mapping per definition in Section 17.1 of ITU-T G.709 recommendation.

– ASYNC mapping mode indicates asynchronous CBR mapping per definition in Section 17.1 of ITU-T G.709 recommendation

The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> BITSYNC initially set by the system.



4-81

DR

AFT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Payload Type: It is the Payload Type (PT) field content of a Payload Structure Identifier (PSI) of the OTUk structure. It has a default value and is based on the encoded client signal. It only apply when OPRMODE (ED-OTU2) is non REGEN mode and when the client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal. In order to facilitate interworking with non compliant PT values. It shall be possible to provision the payload type to a different value in a 2 digits hex format. This parameter does not apply to the OT2TDM module. The allowable values are 2 digits hex format.

The Default value is: <Previously-existing value> initially set by the system based on the client signal. If no client signal is provisioned then the NULL (FD hex) value is used.



• Current Primary State: It specifies the primary secondary service state.• Primary State: By means of this combo-box it is possible to change the primary

service state previously described.• Current Secondary State: It specifies the secondary service state.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user saves the settings.– Remove: By clicking this hyperlink the user logically remove the settings.– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user leave the page.

2. Trail Trace Info panelThe fields of this panel are previously described in 2), but addressed to this facility.

3. OTU2 LINE functional tabClicking on the OTU2 LINE functional tab the page depicted in previous section is shown, but addressed to this facility.

4. OTU2 PM LINE functional tabClicking on the OTU2 PM LINE functional tab the page depicted in previous section is shown, but addressed to this facility.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-44 ODU2 PM Line tab for DWDM module (e.g. XFP)

The page contains:• Retrieve Performance Monitoring panel whose contents are the same previously

described, but addressed to this facility.• PM Init Register functional tab whose contents are the same previously described in

point 2), but addressed to this facility. • PM Report functional tab whose contents are the same previously described in point

1), but addressed to this facility. • PM Mode functional tab whose contents are the same previously described in point

3), but addressed to this facility.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Procedures

ContentsThis section contains the following list of procedures:

Log into System 5-3

Logout of the system 5-6

Change user password 5-8

Change site identifier 5-10

Display alarms 5-11

Provision equipment 5-13

Configure a 1P10GSO module 5-14

Control Plane - Routing: Create Control Channel Interface 5-20

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Network Call 5-25

Control Plane - Signalling: Create Network Connection 5-29

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Traffic Descriptor 5-33

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Hoplist 5-35

Control Plane - Transmission: Create TE-Link 5-37

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Bundle link 5-39

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Abstract link 5-41

Create LAG 5-44

Create Traffic Descriptor- Data 5-48

Create VLAN 5-52

Create color profile 5-54

Create ASAP list 5-56

Create DCC Channel 5-58

Create XC Overhead 5-63

Create ASAP 5-65

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IGMP 5-67

Create IP tunnel 5-70

Create IP route 5-72

Create Gateway Map Table 5-74

Create TCA profile 5-76

Create APS 5-79

Create UPSR 5-81

Create BLSR 5-82

Provision STS Cross Connection 5-84

Provision Conference 5-93

Change the date and time of the Network Element 5-95

OverviewProcedures


5-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Purpose

The aim of this chapter is to introduce the ZIC working environment. The access to the system, the environment utilities and navigation ways through the system are described in detail.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Log into SystemProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Log into System

Purpose

This procedure provides the steps to establish a session with the Network Element (NE) via Zero Installation Craft (ZIC) terminal and to log in a specific user to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160).

The User Identifier (UID) and current Password Identifier (PWD) must be known before login to the system.

Note: The maximum login time interval is 120 seconds.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To login to the ZIC application, open the web browser (e.g., Internet Explorer), enter the IP address of the Network Element (NE) in the address bar as shown in Figure 5-1.



5-5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-1 Login Window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the User Identifier and Password in the respective entry boxes, set the Language from the drop-down list box. The default is English.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Login command button to log into the system, the browser starts loading the ZIC application as shown in Figure 5-2.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-2 Loading ZIC application window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 After the maximum number of attempts the user is disabled. Check parameters for spelling and case-sensitive characters. Go to Step 2 to re-login to the system.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Logout of the systemProcedures


5-7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Logout of the system

Purpose

Use this procedure to terminate a ZIC session with the Network Element (NE) and to logout a specific user.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To logout from the ZIC application, click the Logout hyperlink displayed in the top right corner of the ZIC application as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 ZIC Application Window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Logout hyperlink displays the logout panel as shown in Figure 5-4.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Logout of the systemProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-4 Logout Panel

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the user identifier in the entry box or click Default hyperlink if login as default user.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes to finally logout of the ZIC application.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Change user passwordProcedures


5-9

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change user password

Purpose

Use this procedure to change user’s login password details.

Before you begin, the old and the new user password must be known.

A password is case-sensitive and should be 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters with at least

three of the following:• At least one character in upper-case• At least one character in lower-case• At least one character should be alphanumeric• At least one character should be a special character. The following special

characters are valid:– % (percent sign)– + (plus sign)– # (pound sign)– _ (underscore sign)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To change the user password, Select Security -> User Account -> Change Password option from the menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Change password menu option displays the Modify Password Identifier panel as shown in

Figure 5-5 Modify Password Panel

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The User Identifier and Old Password ID entry boxes displays the UID and PID with which the user has logged in.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the new password in the New Password ID entry box.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change user passwordProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save to set the newly entered password.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 The system generates an error message if the newly entered password is violating the password naming convention. Go to Step 4 to re-enter the correct string.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Change site identifierProcedures


5-11

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change site identifier

Purpose

Use this procedure to change the unique identifier for the NE.

The site identifier appears on the top left corner of the tree-area and is used as a target while addressing the Network Element (NE).........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To set the site identifier, select System Management -> DB Management -> Set Site Identifier option from the menu bar. The ZIC application displays the Set Site Identifier panel as shown in Figure 5-6

Figure 5-6 Set Site Identifier

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Set Site Identifier panel displays the following parameters:– Old Site Identifier - Specifies the old site identifier of the NE. – New Site Identifier - Specifies the new site identifier for the NE.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Double Quotes hyperlink to insert double quotes for the new site identifier.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save to save the newly created identifier.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display alarmsProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Display alarms

Purpose

This procedure provides steps to view the current alarm status in the system.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To view all alarms and conditions, click alarms tab displayed under menu bar as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Alarms

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The TDM/DWDM REPORTED ALARMS: table displays the alarm entries and the corresponding attributes.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The DATA REPORTED ALARMS table displays the data alarm entire with their attributes.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To view all the reported alarms and conditions, click View all alarms & conditions hyperlink as shown in Figure 5-8.

Display alarmsProcedures


5-13

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-8 Alarms- Filter By Panel

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To view the alarms reported a specific domain, open the drop-down list. The values are:– ALL– TDM/DWDM– DATA; the default value is ALL.

Note: The Severity and Aid Type drop-down list boxes are accessible if the domain selected is either TDM/DWDM or DATA.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select TDM/DWDM option from the domain drop-down list box, select the severity level, the values are CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, WARNING, NOT REPORTED, and NOT ALARM.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the equipment access identifiers for which the alarm report is required and click Search. The system displays the alarm reported by the selected equipment.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Cancel to return to the previous window.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision equipmentProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision equipment

Purpose

Use this procedure to perform equipment provisioning.

General

ENT-EQPT command assigns an equipment object entity at the AID physical location and provisions the specified equipment regardless of whether the equipment is installed in the system.

The following equipment is mandatory and is automatically provisioned in the system:– EC320– MT320– POW320– FAN320– TBUS

The following equipment is non-mandatory and can be pre-provisioned in the system: – IOCs: 10GSO, 2G5SO, 8XSO, OT2TDM, 10XANY, LOA10G, PRE (Pre

amplifier), BOOST (Booster), LOFA (Line Optical Fiber and Attenuator), DWLA10X (DWDM Optical Transponder), CWLA (CWDM Optical Transponder), CADM, CWDM, OADM

– Data cards: PP1GE, 1P10GSO, and PP10AD– XFP: IOC, 10GSO, and 8PSO

First Level Controllers (FLCs) for EC320

FLC (also known as Equipment Controllers) are installed in slots 1 and 2. They are fully redundant. Both FLCs have hard disk on them which is implemented as a software RAID configuration. When a protection group is configured, plugging the spare FLC into the shelf causes the master controller to start the disk synchronization. A software download (SWDWL) condition becomes active on the spare FLC, and the equipment protection switch (EPS) LED turns to green on the master controller. The standby boards secondary state (SST) is placed into SWDWL status. This condition is cleared when the disk is aligned. Disks are automatically aligned by the FLC operating system.

Configure a 1P10GSO moduleProcedures


5-15

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure a 1P10GSO module

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure a 10GSO module on a select board.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Rack xx -> Shelf xx -> Board xx from the tree area as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Rack xx -> Shelf xx -> Board xx

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the board to be provisioned from the Provisioned Type drop-down list box. In this case 1P10GSO.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-1, “Board x parameters” (p. 5-15) provides description of the Rack x > Shelf x > Board x parameters.

Table 5-1 Board x parameters

Parameter Description

Access Identifier Specifies the access identifier of the selected module

Actual Type Specifies if the board is configured or not

Provisioned Type Specifies the type of equipment to be provisioned

Primary state Specifies the primary state of the equipment. The values are: • IS• OOS

Automatic In-Service Mode Indicates the automatic in-service mode. The values are:• AINS• NOWAIT

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save to store the settings, the right pane displays the parameters of the selected boards.

Figure 5-10 Rack xx -> Shelf xx -> Board xx

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Set the board parameters displayed in the Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx panel and click Save to store the settings.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Remove to deprovision the board from the specific slot.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 The Alarms hyperlink provides the list of alarms raised for the board.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click provision hyperlink to provision the SFP/XFP module for the selected board as shown in Figure 5-11.



5-17

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-11 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Module xx

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the SFP/XFP module from the Provisioned Type drop-down list box. In this case XI-641.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Save to save the settings, the tree area displays the XFP module provisioned on the selected facility as shown in Figure 5-12.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-12 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Module xx

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click View hyperlink displayed under Alarms to view the alarms/conditions raised by the equipment.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click Create hyperlink to configure the OCn signal for the selected port as shown in Figure 5-13.



5-19

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-13 Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Port xx

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 The Rack xx > Shelf xx > Board xx > Module xx > Port xx displays the following tabs:– OC/GBE– PM– PROTECTION– STS– List STS

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: The OC/GBE tab parameters are displayed by default.Chapter 4, “Access a resource” provides the description.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Configure OSPF and DDRPProcedures


5-21

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Configure OSPF and DDRP

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure OSPF AREA, OSPF DB, OSPF NEIGHBOR, DDRP AREA, DDRP DB, DDRP NEIGHBOR from the Control Plane in the tree area.

Clicking on CTRL PLANE: CP from the tree area the below page appears.

Figure 5-14 Control Plane

Table 5-2 provides the description of parameters of the Control Plane Global Parameter Panel as shown in the Figure 5-14.

Table 5-2 Control Plane Global Parameter Panel


IP Address The entry boxes allow to enter the Internet Protocol address. Format: {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}

default OSPF Area AID It specifies the Default OSPF Area ID associated to all the new created OSPF interface. Format: {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}

default DDRP Area AID It specifies the Default DDRP Area ID associated to all the new created DDRP interfaces. Format: {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane Garbage Collection and Release CP Resources are useful to free all unused CP transport resources.

On the Control plane page the following functional tabs are present as shown in Figure 5-14:• OSPF AREA• OSPF DB• OSPF NEIGHBOR• DDRP AREA• DDRP DB• DDRP NEIGHBOR

Configure OSPF AREA

Use this procedure to configure the OSPF Area.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the OSPF AREA functional tab, the following page appears.

Auto Config Allows to enable or disable the CP Auto Configuration mode. The available choices are: ON (auto configuration enabled) or OFF (auto configuration disabled).

Port ALM Enabled Allows enabling or disabling the sending of event notifications about port event to Control Plane system. The available choices are: Y (alarm enabled) or N (alarm disabled).

Route ALM Enabled Allows enabling or disabling the sending of event notifications about routing protection event for Control Plane system. The available choices are: Y (alarm enabled) or N (alarm disabled).

Signal ALM Enabled Allows enabling or disabling the sending of event notifications about signaling event to Control Plane system. The available choices are: Y (alarm enabled) or N (alarm disabled).

Advertise The options are Y or N.

Save Allows to save the settings.




5-23

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-15 OSPF AREA

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page contains a table and a panel.

The table with check box which allows to select (validated check box) or not select (blank check box) an access identifier (# AID) with the relevant router quantity:• BORDER ROUTERS COUNT It represents the total number of Border Routers

(BR) reachable within this DDRP area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.

• AS BORDER ROUTERS COUNT It represents the total number of Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBR) reachable within this DDRP area.

Table 5-3 provides the description of parameters of OSPF AREA Panel as shown in the Figure 5-15.

Table 5-3 OSPF AREA Panel


AID It specifies an access Identifier for an OSPF area. Format: {0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255} or ALL.

SPF RUNS It represents the number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area's link-state database. Format: <INTEGER>.

BORDER ROUTERS COUNT

It represents the total number of border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass. Format: <INTEGER>.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Configure OSPF DB

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the OSPF DB functional tab, the following page appears.

Figure 5-16 OSPF DB

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page shows the OSPF DB panel, which consists of the following items:• LSA-ID: It identifies the piece of OSPF Area that is being described by the

advertisement.

AS BORDER ROUTERS COUNT

It represents the total number of Autonomous System border router reachable with this area. Format: <INTEGER>.

LSA COUNT It represents the total number of link-state advertisements in this area's link-state database, excluding AS External LSA's. Format: <INTEGER>.

LSA CHECKSUM It represents the 32-bit unsigned sum of the link-state advertisements' LS checksums contained in this area's link-state database. This sum excludes external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements. This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link-state database of two routers. Format: <INTEGER>.

OPAQUE LSA COUNT It represents the number of LSAs with type-10 in this area's link State database. Format: <INTEGER>.

OPAQUE LSA CHECKSUM It retrieves the 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all LSAs with LS type-10 in this area's Link State Database. Format: <INTEGER>.

Cancel Exits the tab and will show the Control Plane Global Parameter panel.




5-25

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• ORIGINATING ROUTER ID: It identifies the originating router for the LSAs in the Autonomous System.

• LSA TYPE: Allows to identify the piece of the DDRP Area that is being described by the advertisement. Possible values are: ROUTER, NETWORK, EXTERNAL, TE-AREA, TE-LINK or empty.The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel which exits the tab and will show the Control PLane Global Parameter

panel.– Search which starts the searching procedure.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Configure OSPF NEIGHBOR

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the OSPF NEIGHBOR functional tab, the following page appears.

Figure 5-17 OSPF NEIGHBOR

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page contains a table and a panel. The table shows check box which allows to select (validated check box) or not select (blank check box) an access identifier (AID) with the relevant router quantity.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-4 OSPF NEIGHBOR tab Parameters


AID It represents the Access Identifier for the OSPF neighbor entity. Possible value are:• ALL (ALL AID)• LAN-1 (Customer LAN)• OC12-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-8} (OC-12)• OC3-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-8} (OC-3)• OC48-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-4, 5, 7} (OC-

48 on a 2G5SO or 10xANY)• OC192-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-1 (OC192)• IPIP-{1-300000} (Virtual Link using IPover IP

encapsulation)• GRE-{1-300000} (Virtual Link using GRE

encapsulation)

ROUTER It represents the identifier (represented as a type IP Address) of the neighboring router in the Autonomous System. Possible value are: {1-99, 101-126, 128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{1-254}

REMOTE PORT It represents the IP address this neighbor is using in its IP Source Address. Note that, on addressless links, this will not be 0-0-0-0, but the address of another of the neighbor’s interfaces. Possible value are: {1-99, 101-126, 128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{1-254}

STATE It represents the state of the relationship with the neighbor. The first four states (from DOWN to TWO_WAY) are related to router adjacency status with exchange of OSPF "Hello" packets. The last four (from EXCHANGE_START to FULL) are involved for route discovery , exchanging OSPF LSA packets.Possible value are: DOWN, ATTEMPT, INIT, TWO-WAY, EXCHANGE-START, EXCHANGE, LOADING, FULL

DEADTIME It represents the time remaining in seconds within which we need to receive an hello packet from the neighbor or we declare the adjacency down. If fast hellos area in use, this value is always set to 1. If the operational status is down or ospfPmNbrState is DOWN, then the value is set to zero and the field is not valid. Possible value is <INTEGER>.

RTXQ It represents the current length of the retransmission queue. Possible value is <INTEGER>.

EVENTS It represents the number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred. Possible value is <INTEGER>.



5-27

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The OSPF NEIGHBOR panel contains the same fields previously described for the above table but for a single AID selected by means of the check box.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Configure DDRP AREA

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the DDRP AREA functional tab, the following page appears.

Figure 5-18 DDRP AREA

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page contains a table and a panel.

The table with check box which allows to select (validated check box) or not select (blank check box) a DDRP Area information (#): • #: It refers the number for the DDRP Area.• AID: It specifies an access identifier for a DDRP area. If ALL is specified all Area IDs

present will be show. Format: {0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255} or ALL.

RQST It represents the number of LSAs we have requested from this neighbor for which we are still awaiting a response. This number is incremented when an LSA is requested by sending a LS request packet and is decremented when the LSA arrives in an LS update packet. Possible value is <INTEGER>.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• BRSCOUNT: It represents the total number of Border Routers (BR) reachable within this DDRP area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.

• ASBRSCOUNT: It represents the total number of Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBR) reachable within this DDRP area.

Table 5-5 provides the description of DDRP Area Panel as shown in Figure 5-18.

Table 5-5 DDRP AREA Panel

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Configure DDRP DB

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the DDRP DB functional tab, the following page appears.


AID It specifies an access Identifier for an DDRP area. Format: {0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255} or ALL.

SPF RUNS It represents the number of times that the intra-area DDRP routing table has been calculated using this area's link-state database. Format: <INTEGER>.

BRSCOUNT It represents the total number of Border Routers (BR) reachable within this DDRP area.This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass. Format: <INTEGER>.

ASBRSCOUNT It represents the total number of Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBR) reachable within this DDRP area. Format: <INTEGER>.

OPAQUE LSA COUNT It represents the number of DDRP LSAs with LS type-10 (Opaque LSA) in this area's Link State Database. Format: <INTEGER>.

OPAQUE LSA CHECKSUM It retrieves the 32 bit sum of LS checksums of all DDRP LSAs with LS type-10 in this area's Link State Database. Format: <INTEGER>.

Cancel Exits the tab and will show the Control PLane Global Parameter



5-29

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-19 DDRP DB

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page contains a table. The page contains a table’s row with check box which allows to select (validated check box) or not select (blank check box) a Database Link State Advertisement (LSA-DB) with the relevant parameters: • LSA-ID: It filters on LSA-ID the retrieve of LSAs. It identifies the piece of the DDRP

Area that is being described by the advertisement. Area identifier can be retrieved from Control PLane Global Parameter panel. Possible value is an address in this format {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}.

• ORIGINATING ROUTER ID: It filters on ORIGINATING ROUTER ID the retrieve of LSAs. It identifies the originating router for the LSAs in the Autonomous System. Possible value is an address in this format {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}.

The panel has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel which exits the tab and will show the Control PLane Global Parameter

panel.– Search which starts the searching procedure.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Configure DDRP NEIGHBOR

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Clicking on the DDRP NEIGHBOR functional tab, the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-20 DDRP NEIGHBOR

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The page contains a table and a panel. The table with check box which allows to select (validated check box) or not select (blank check box) an access identifier (AID) with the relevant router quantity.

Table 5-6 DDRP NEIGHBOR tab


AID It specifies a physical access to the OC-N facility (N = 3, 12, 48, 192) or a Virtual link. Possible value are:• ALL (ALL AID)• OC12-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-8} (OC-12)• OC3-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-8} (OC-3)• OC48-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-{1-3, 5, 7} (OC-

48)• OC192-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12-19,21-36}-1 (OC192)• IPIP-{1-300000} (Virtual Link using IPover IP

encapsulation)• GRE-{1-300000} (Virtual Link using GRE

encapsulation)• VAID-{1-300000} (Virtual Link associated to logical

InFiber-OutOfBand port)

ROUTER (Neighboring Router Identifier in the Autonomous System). It is represented as a type IP v4 Address. Possible value are: {1-99, 101-126, 128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{1-254}



5-31

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The DDRP NEIGHBOR panel contains the same fields previously described for the above table but for a single AID selected by means of the check box.

REMOTE PORT It represents the IP address this neighbor is using in its IP Source Address. Note that, on addressless links, this will not be 0-0-0-0, but the address of another of the neighbor’s interfaces. Possible value are: {1-99, 101-126, 128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{1-254}

STATE It represents the state of the relationship with the neighbor on DDRP Interface. The first four states (from DOWN to TWO_WAY) are related to router adjacency status with exchange of DDRP "Hello" packets. The last four (from EXCHANGE_START to FULL) are involved for route discovery, exchanging DDRP LSA packets.. Possible value are: DOWN, ATTEMPT, INIT, TWO-WAY, EXCHANGE-START, EXCHANGE, LOADING, FULL.

DEADTIME It represents the time remaining in seconds within which we need to receive an hello packet from the neighbor or we declare the adjacency down. If fast hellos area in use, this value is always set to 1. If the operational status is down or ddrpPmNbrState is DOWN, then the value is set to zero and the field is not valid. Possible value is <INTEGER>.

RTXQ It represents the current length of the retransmission queue. Unit is expressed in Bytes in a <INTEGER> format

EVENTS It represents the number of times this DDRP interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred. Possible value is <INTEGER>.

RQST It represents the number of LSAs we have requested from this neighbor for which we are still awaiting a response. This number is incremented when an LSA is requested by sending a LS request packet and is decremented when the LSA arrives in an LS update packet. Possible value is <INTEGER>.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Routing: Create Control Channel InterfaceProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Routing: Create Control Channel Interface

Purpose

Use this procedure to Create Control Channel Interface.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Routing option in the Menu bar or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> ROUTING: CPROU options in the Tree area.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on the CREATE CONTROL CHANNEL INTERFACE hyperlink, the following page appears:

Figure 5-21 Control Channel Interface creation page

The page is made up of the Control Channel Interface Creation panel.

The panel contains:• Control Channel Port: By means the combo-box it is possible to select the control

channel termination port. It can be an TE-Link facility (IF-OOB through DCC channel), an external access identifier (LAN, IPIP, GRE) in OF-OOB application, or a virtual link (VAID) associated to IF-OOB termination port (access to the NE CP facility). The available choices are:– IPIP – GRE – LAN– TE-LINK– VAID

The page has the following hyperlink:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user cancels the operation and returns to the

previous page.– Create: By clicking this hyperlink, according with the combo-box selection the

following pages will appear.



5-33

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IPIP Creation

Clicking on the Create after the IPIP selection in the combo-box, the following page appears:

Figure 5-22 IP-IP Port Creation Page

The page contains the IP-IP PORT CREATION panel:• Access Identifier: The entry box allows to enter the Access Identifier of the control

channel termination port. Allowable input parameter value and format:– IPIP-{10-300000} Virtual Link using IPover IP encapsulationIt can be an OCn facility (IF-OOB configuration through DCC channel), an external access identifier (LAN, IPIP, GRE) in OF-OOB application or a virtual link (VAID) associated to IF-OOB termination port. The latter are provided to support DDRP logical interface. VAID is referenced to the physical port access on DCC channel.

• IP Address: The entry boxes allow to enter the Internet Protocol address. If the port is NUMBERED this parameter represents its local IP address. The type of this address must be IPv4 type. Value range [1-99, 101-126,128-223] - [0-255] - [0-255] - [0-254].

• Mask: it is the entry boxes of the IP Mask, it is the IP subnet mask of the route (in the format [0-255] - [0-255] - [0-255] - [0-255]). Default value: 0-0-0-0.

• Port Class: The combo-box allows the user to define the Control Plane port type for control channel termination. The user can establish on which port type control channel has to be terminated. Choosing INNI the port is on an intra-domain link that contained entirely within the routing domain. Choosing ENNI the port is an inter-domain link or intra-domain link: link which connects this routing domain with a neighboring routing domain. Allowable values are:– INNI, INTRA-ENNI and INTER-ENNI. Default value: INNI.

• Mtu: (Maximum Transmit Unit) The entry box allows to adjust the size, in octets, for packet transfer in control channel. Value range: {1-1500}. Default value: 1491.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Encaps Remote Address: The entry boxes allow to set the parameter that is used to enter the IP address of the remote end of the control channel termination port. Value range {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}.

• Encaps Remote Id: The entry boxes allow to set the parameter that is used to enter the IP address of the remote end of the control channel termination node. Value range: {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}.

• Status: The combo-box allows the user to choose the state of the Control channel port administrative status. Allowable values are:– ON Control channel is enabled by management– OFF Control channel is disabled by managementThe page has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink you go back to the Control Channel Interface

Creation panel.– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user apply the changes and turn back to the

previous page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

GRE Creation

Clicking on the Create after the GRE selection in the combo-box, the following page appears:

Figure 5-23 GRE Port Creation Page

The page contains the GRE PORT CREATION panel which has the same fields described in the IPIP creation section.

TE- Link Creation

Clicking on the Create after the TE-Link selection in the combo-box, the following page appears:



5-35

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-24 TE-Link Port Creation Page

The page contains the TE-LINK PORT CREATION panel which has some fields described in the previous section.

LAN Creation

Clicking on the Create after the LAN selection in the combo-box, the following page appears:

Figure 5-25 LAN Port Creation Page

The page contains the LAN PORT CREATION panel which has some fields described in the previous section.

VAID Creation

Clicking on the Create after the VAID selection in the combo-box, the following page appears:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-26 VAID Port Creation Page

The page contains the VAID PORT CREATION panel which has some fields described in the previous section.

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Network CallProcedures


5-37

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Network Call

Purpose

The procedure allows an operator to establish one Network CALL between two user access points in the network, defined by their TNA Address (Transport Network Identifier). This CALL can go through multiple network domains, and have multiple connections associated with a call.

Call is an end-to-end service connection, involving multiple domains, whereas a connection is placed on local domain.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Signalling option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Signaling page click on the Create Network CALL hyperlink or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> SIGNALING: CPSIG -> CALL: CPCALL options in the Tree area, then in the CP Call page select CALL in the Link Type combo-box and click on the Create hyperlink. The Create Call page appears.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Figure 5-27 Call Creation Page

The Create Call panel contains:• Call identifier: The entry box allows to digit the Call Identifier (Call ID) as call name

assigned by user in the Control Plane. Call ID significance is related to Description parameter.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Description: The entry box allows to digit a connection description assigned by user in the Control Plane for the Network CALL.

• Replace (using make-before-break technique): The entry box allows to digit the present connection replacement using make-before-break technique.

• Direction: The combo-box allows to select the CALL connection direction (unidirectional/bidirectional). Possible values:– UNIDIR unidirectional– BIDIR bidirectional

• Call Type: The combo-box allows to select the significance for the Call identifier parameter. Possible values:– OPERATOR Call Identifier has a format for local significance.– GLOBAL Call Identifier has a format for global significance.

• Source Port ID: The entry box allows to digit, in the <rate>-<rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format, the Service termination Port Access Identifier. It is located on the originating node of the connection. Port AID can be an OC-n facility or a VCG termination type.

• Destination Port ID: The entry box allows to digit, in the <rate>-<rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format, the Service termination Port Access Identifier. It is located on the destination node of the connection. Port AID can be an OC-n facility or a VCG termination type.

• Source Label: The entry box allows to digit a generalized Label value to be used at connection source on ingress node port. Label format is defined only for SONET layer (TDM label type) <five dash separated numeric string> S#-U#- K#-L#-M# format. Possible values:– S#={0 - 65535} (Index of STS-3/AUG-1 within a STS-3xN /STM-N multiplexed

signal)– U# = {0 - 15} (Index of STS-1-SPE/VC-3 within a STS-3/AUG-1 signal)– K# = {0 - 15} (Index of TUG-3 within a VC-4 signal)– L# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT-Group/TUG-2 within a STS-1-SPE/TUG-3 or VC-3

signal)– M# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT1.5-SPE/VC11 or VT2-SPE/VC12 or VT3-SPE within

a VTGroup/TUG-2 signal)• Destination Label: The entry box allows to digit a generalized Label value to be used

at connection destination on egress node port. Label format is defined only for SONET layer (TDM label type) <five dash separated numeric string> S#-U#- K#-L#-M# format. Possible values:– S#={0 - 65535} (Index of STS-3/AUG-1 within a STS-3xN /STM-N multiplexed

signal)– U# = {0 - 15} (Index of STS-1-SPE/VC-3 within a STS-3/AUG-1 signal)– K# = {0 - 15} (Index of TUG-3 within a VC-4 signal)



5-39

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– L# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT-Group/TUG-2 within a STS-1-SPE/TUG-3 or VC-3 signal)

– M# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT1.5-SPE/VC11 or VT2-SPE/VC12 or VT3-SPE within a VTGroup/TUG-2 signal)

• TNA Source Address: The entry box allows to digit the Source TNA IP Address as originating point of the connection. Only IP v.4 format is supported for the source TNA IP Address.

• Possible values: {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}• TNA Destination Address: The entry box allows to digit the Source TNA IP Address

as target point of the connection. Only IP v.4 format is supported for the source TNA IP Address. Possible values: {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254}

• Include ALL: The entry box allows to digit the call connection path that includes all affinity (resource color) constrain. All links matching this specified affinity value (32 bit integer) are included in path computation for the network call. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}

• Include ANY: The entry box allows to digit the call connection path that includes any affinity (resource color) constrain. Any of the links matching this specified affinity value (32 bit integer) are included in path computation for the network call. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}

• Exclude ANY: The entry box allows to digit the call connection path that excludes any affinity (resource color) constrain. Any of the links matching this specified affinity value (32 bit integer) shall be excluded in path computation for the network call. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}

• Service level: The entry box allows to digit the connection service style defining connection protection, reversion and other attributes. It is mapped to a class level, in a decreasing order. For instance, Service level = 31 means a connection with "1+1 protection, non revertive, with full SRLG and best node diversity".

• Admin Status: The combo-box allows to select the CALL administrative status, set by management. Possible values:– ON CALL is committed– OFF CALL is provisioned but not committed

• Traffic Identifier: The entry box allows to define bandwidth profile for the end-to-end connection, referred to the LSP tunnel. For E-NNI connection, only TD-ID with switching capability = TDM or DWDM are supported, for Packet connection only PSC is supported. Command is rejected if matching TD could not be found. Clicking on the select hyperlink, starts the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

• Hoplist ID: The entry box allows to define Hoplist Identifier assigned by user in the Control Plane for the end-to-end connection. It defines a sequence of "next-hops" in the connection set-up, using ERO Object RSVP signaling. If this parameter is not

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

specified, path is retrieved from CSPF database. Clicking on the select hyperlink, starts the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

Control Plane - Signalling: Create Network ConnectionProcedures


5-41

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signalling: Create Network Connection

Purpose

The procedure allows an operator to establish one Network CONNECTION between two nodes (source and destination point), as a path component of a Network CALL (call segment). This connection can go through one or multiple network domains.

In case of a single domain (INNI connection), user can also set source and destination parameters of the connection (source/destination node and termination point identifiers). On the other end, where multiple network domains are involved, connection is referred as E-NNI type and only tunnel profile parameters are required.

This procedure creates an LSP tunnel between source and destination point and uses extended RSVP-TE protocol for signalling. In the connection set-up, input parameters for LSP bandwidth and hop list routing are taken from TD-ID/ HOPLIST-ID values. All input parameters are referenced to OIF-E-NNI-Sig-01.0: Intra-Carrier E-NNI Signaling Specification (OIF E-NNI 1.0).........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Signalling option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Signaling page click on the Create Network CONNECTION hyperlink or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> SIGNALING: CPSIG -> CONN: CPCONN options in the Tree area, then in the CP Conn page click on the Create NETWOK CONNECTION hyperlink. The Create Conn page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-28 Network Creation Page

The Create Conn panel contains:• Call identifier: The entry box allows to digit the Connection Identifier as connection

name assigned by user in the Control Plane. Connection Identifier has to be unique in the system.

• Replace (using make-before-break technique): The entry box allows to digit the present connection replacement using make-before-break technique.

• Direction: The combo-box allows to select the CALL connection direction (unidirectional/bidirectional). Possible values:– UNIDIR unidirectional– BIDIR bidirectional

• Protection Type: The combo-box allows to select the Connection path protection type assigned by user in the Control Plane. Its significance is related to Layer parameter. Possible values:– NO (unprotected)– PATH-ONE-TO-ONE For future release– PATH-ONE-PLUS-ONE For TDM layer– PATH-REROUTE For future release– LINK-ONE-TO-ONE For future release– LINK-ONE-PLUS-ONE For TDM layer



5-43

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– LOCAL-REPAIR For future release• Layer: The combo-box allows to select the Layer type for the connection. It is related

to switching capability of the LSP tunnel. Possible values:– MPLS– PSC– TDM– DWDM

• Source Address: The entry box allows to digit, in the {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254} format, the Source Node IP Address as originating point of the connection. This parameter is applied only for INNI connections.

• Destination Address: The entry box allows to digit, in the {1-99, 101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {1-254} format, the Destination Node IP Address as target point of the connection. This parameter is applied only for INNI connections.

• Source Port ID: The entry box allows to digit, in the <rate>-<rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format, the Service termination Port Access Identifier. It is located on the originating node of the connection. Port AID can be an OC-n facility or a VCG termination type.

• Destination Port ID: The entry box allows to digit, in the <rate>-<rack>-<shelf>-<slot> format, the Service termination Port Access Identifier. It is located on the target node of the connection. Port AID can be an OC-n facility or a VCG termination type.

• Source Label: The entry box allows to digit a generalized Label value to be used at connection source on ingress node port. Label format depends on the selected layer type (MPLS/TDM). <five dash separated numeric string> (TDM label type) S#-U#- K#-L#-M# format. Format label is defined only for TDM layer. Possible values:– S#={0 - 65535} (Index of STS-3/AUG-1 within a STS-3xN multiplexed signal)– U# = {0 - 15} (Index of STS-1-SPE/VC-3 within a STS-3/AUG-1 signal)– K# = {0 - 15} (Index of TUG-3 within a VC-4 signal)– L# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT-Group/TUG-2 within a STS-1-SPE/TUG-3 or VC-3


a VTGroup/TUG-2 signal)• Destination Label: The entry box allows to digit a generalized Label value to be used

at connection destination on egress node port. Label format is defined only for SONET layer (TDM label type) <five dash separated numeric string> (TDM label type) S#-U#- K#-L#-M# format. Format label is defined only for TDM layer. Possible values:– S#={0 - 65535} (Index of STS-3/AUG-1 within a STS-3xN multiplexed signal)– U# = {0 - 15} (Index of STS-1-SPE/VC-3 within a STS-3/AUG-1 signal)– K# = {0 - 15} (Index of TUG-3 within a VC-4 signal)– L# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT-Group/TUG-2 within a STS-1-SPE/TUG-3 or VC-3

signal)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– M# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT1.5-SPE/VC11 or VT2-SPE/VC12 or VT3-SPE within a VTGroup/TUG-2 signal)

• Revertive Protection: The combo-box allows to select the Revertive protection for path protected connection support. It applies at path protection switching, restoring or not the primary path when it becomes available. This parameter is valid if path protection is selected by user on Protection Type input. Possible values: YES or NO (default).

• Pinned mode supported: The combo-box allows to select the Connection pinned mode support. It is applied on path restoration. If this parameter entered as YES, then, upon connection restoration the new path will strictly follow the original connection path. Possible values: YES or NO (default).

• Include ALL: The entry box allows to digit the connection path including all affinity (resource color) constrain. All the links matching this specified affinity value (32-bit integer) are included in path computation for the network connection. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}.

• Include ANY: The entry box allows to digit the connection path includes any affinity (resource color) constrain. Any of the links matching this specified affinity value (32-bit integer) are included in path computation for the network connection. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}.

• Exclude ANY: The entry box allows to digit the Connection path excludes any affinity (resource color) constrain. Any of the links matching this specified affinity value (32-bit integer) are excluded in path computation for the network connection. Possible values: {1 - 4294967295}.

• Admin State: The combo-box allows to select the Connection administrative status, set by management. Possible values:– ON: Connection is committed.– OFF: Connection is provisioned but not committed.

• Traffic Identifier: The entry box allows to define bandwidth profile for the end-to-end connection, referred to the LSP tunnel. For E-NNI connection, only TD-ID with switching capability = TDM or DWDM are supported, for Packet connection only PSC is supported. Command is rejected if matching TD could not be found. Clicking on the select hyperlink, starts the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

• Hoplist ID: The entry box allows to define Hoplist Identifier assigned by user in the Control Plane for the end-to-end connection. It defines a sequence of "next-hops" in the connection set-up, using ERO Object RSVP signaling. If this parameter is not specified, path is retrieved from CSPF database. Clicking on the select hyperlink, starts the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Traffic DescriptorProcedures


5-45

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Traffic Descriptor

Purpose

This procedure creates in the Control Plane a Traffic Descriptor to be used by control plane SONET connections. This command provides a parameter set for control plane TDM tunnel timeslots.

The control plane automatically assigns TD Identifier parameter (TD-ID) as result of successful response.

For E-NNI connection, only Traffic Descriptor with switching capability = TDM or DWDM are supported, for Packet connection only PSC is supported. Command is rejected if matching Traffic Descriptor could not be found. Entry is only allowed when connection is not committed (OFF) or both released and deactivated (STATUS=OFF and STATE= DOWN).........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Signalling option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Signaling page click on the Traffic Desc functional tab or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> SIGNALING: CPSIG options in the Tree area, then in the CP Signalling page click on the Traffic Desc functional tab. The Create Traffic Descriptor page appears.

Figure 5-29 SIGNALLING - Traffic Desc functional tab

The Traffic Desc functional tab contains:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Traffic DescriptorProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Signal type: By means the combo-box it is possible to select the signal rate structure for a TDM MPLS tunnel. It defines the transport frame in the SONET hierarchy structure and represents the switching "granularity" of the TDM LSP tunnel. The allowable choices are: VT1-5-SPE or VT2-SPE or VT3-SPE or VT6-SPE or STS-1-SPE or STS-3C-SPE or STS1 or STS3 or STS12 or STS48 or STS192 or STS768.

• Concatenation Type: By means the combo-box it is possible to select the Concatenation for SONET virtual containers in TDM MPLS tunnel. It is defined to transport tributary signals with rate in excess of basic STS-1/STM-1 signal. The allowable values are: ON or OFF.

• Concatenation Number: The entry box allows to digit the Number of concatenated VC-x/VT-x containers in a TDM MPLS tunnel. (16 bit-wide). Concatenation is on byte interleaving basis (contiguous concatenation). This parameter is valid if Concatenation Type = ON, otherwise is ignored. The allowable values are: <numeric value> in the {1-65535} range.

• Virtual Concatenation Number: The entry box allows to digit the Number of virtual concatenated VCx/VT-x containers in a TDM MPLS tunnel (16 bit-wide). Concatenation is based on logical association that tight together all the containers inside the Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) through some algorithm (i.e. inverse multiplexing, LCAS). This parameter is valid if Concatenation Type = ON, otherwise is ignored. Concatenation and Virtual Concatenation are mutually exclusive inside the same transport frame. The allowable values are: <numeric value> in the {1-65535} range.

• Multiplier: The entry box allows to digit the Number of identical signals transported in the TDM tunnel layer (16 bit-wide). These signals can be identical elementary signals, identical contiguously concatenated signals, or identical virtually concatenated signals. The allowable values are: <numeric value> in the {1-65535} range.

• Transparency Mode: By means the combo-box it is possible to select the Transparency mode for SONET transport frame into a TDM MPLS tunnel. It defines type of transparency on SONET signal payload carried into the switching network. The allowable choices are:– PATH: Transparency is achieved on path layer with higher order SONET path

switching. Line overhead is modified or terminated.– LINE: Line overhead is preserved and the entire MS (multiplexer section) is

switched as a whole. Section overhead is modified or terminated. – SECTION: Preservation of all section overhead in the switched signal. Basically

does not touch any of the SONET bits.The page has the following hyperlinks:– Cancel: By clicking this hyperlink the user to exit the window.– Save: By clicking this hyperlink the user to save the settings.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Signaling: Create HoplistProcedures


5-47

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signaling: Create Hoplist

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to modify the parameters associated to OSPF on each OSPF enabled interface over control channel termination port (DCC, LAN, or encapsulated access via IPIP or GRE). Moreover this command can optionally provide OSPF packet authentication with Key ID for MD5 encryption algorithm.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Signalling option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Signaling page select the Hoplist functional tab or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> SIGNALING: CPSIG options in the Tree area, then in the CP Signalling page click on the Hoplist functional tab. The Create Hoplist page appears.

Figure 5-30 Hoplist Creation Page

The Create Hoplist panel contains:• Node IP Address: The entry box allows to digit the Node IP Address (Node ID) for a

given indexed hop. It applies to the next hop node in the routing path.• Port Access IDentifier: The entry box allows to digit the Port Access IDentifier for a

given indexed hop. It applies on unnumbered interface of the node in the next hop node of the routing path. Port AID is any kind of AID facility (OC-n, VC virtual AID, or port if index). It is translated internally into a 4 bytes integer value. For TDM application, OC-n or VCG facilities are valid.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Signaling: Create HoplistProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Label Type: The combo-box allows to select a generalized label type used in the Hoplist. It is related to the LSP tunnel switching capability. LAMBDA label type is not currently supported. Possible values:– MPLS Label type for PSC switching– TDM Label type for SONET switching– LAMBDA Label type for DWDM switching

• Label value: This entry boxes allow to digit a label value to be used in the routing path. Label value format depends on the label type. Currently only label value for TDM type is used (<five dash separated numeric string> S#-U#- K#-L#-M# format). Possible values:– S#={0 - 65535} (Index of STS-3/AUG-1 within a STS-3xN /STM-N multiplexed

signal)– U# = {0 - 15} (Index of STS-1-SPE/VC-3 within a STS-3/AUG-1 signal)– K# = {0 - 15} (Index of TUG-3 within a VC-4 signal)– L# = {0 - 15} (Index of VT-Group/TUG-2 within a STS-1-SPE/TUG-3 or VC-3


a VTGroup/TUG-2 signal)• Include/Exclude mode: The combo-box allows to select include (INCLUDE) or

exclude (EXCLUDE) the hop address set for path routing. • Path routing mode: The combo-box allows to select the Path routing mode selected

by user. Possible values:– EXPLICIT Path routing is manually assigned by user via Node IP Address and

Port Access IDentifier parameters.– DYNAMIC Path routing is retrieved from CSPF database.

• RSVP path: The combo-box allows to select the RSVP path constraint selected by user for next destination hop. It applies on the indexed hop in the Hoplist. Possible values:– LOOSE Next hop can be routed via different paths to the destination node.– STRICT Next hop is directly connected to the destination nodeThe page has the following hyperlink:– Cancel: Allows to came back to the previous page without applying the user’s

operation.– Save: Applies the user’s operation in this page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Transmission: Create TE-LinkProcedures


5-49

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Transmission: Create TE-Link

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Transmission option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Transmission page and click on Create or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> TRANSMISSION: CPTRS -> TE-LINK: CPPORTTLINK options in the Tree area, then in the CP TRANSMISSION TE-Link page select TE-LINK in the Link Type combo-box and click on the Create hyperlink. The CP TE-Link Provisioning page appears:

Figure 5-31 CP TE-Link Provisioning page

The CP TE-Link Provision panel contains:• Access Identifier: The entry box allows to digit the Access Identifier that identifies

the access to the facility. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

• Link Administrative Status: The combo-box allows to select the administrative state of the CP port. When it is in OFF then this port can't be used for CP services provisioning. Possible values: ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled).

• Port Class: The combo-box allows to user establishing on which link class the port belongs. Possible values:– UNI (default for GBE, VCG)– INNI (default for OCn, BNDL)– INTRA-DM-ENNI (default for ABSL)– INTER-DM-ENNI

• Metric: The entry field allows to specify the Traffic Engineering metric for this interface. Used in CSPF calculations. It corresponds to the cost of the link to be used in path computation. This parameter isn't relevant when PORT-CLASS=UNI.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Transmission: Create TE-LinkProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Colour (hexadecimal): The entry field allows to specify the attribute of the TE link resource class. The resource class is a 32 bits field. This parameter is not relevant when PORT-CLASS=UNI.

• Shared Risk Link Group: The entry field allows to specify the Shared Risk Link Group (SRLG) that a link on this interface belongs to. Links belong to the same SRLG if they share the same risk characteristics. A SRLG is represented by a number. Zero is a valid SRLG number. Each SRLG is unique within an IGP domain. This SRLG-LIST parameter is an un-ordered list of 32-bit numbers and each number represent one SRLG. The user can define max 16 numbers (max 16 SRLG) using grouping and/or ranging addressing. This parameter is not applicable for PORT-CLASS=UNI and it is set to the default value.

• Automatic Layer Discovery: The combo-box allows to enable or disable auto layer discovery using J0. This parameter is relevant only for OCn facility (both for component and not-component ports). For UNI ports, DISCOVERY parameter must be DISABLED. Possible values: ENABLED or DISABLED (default value if PORT-CLASS=INTER-DM-ENNI).

• RSVP Authentication: The combo-box allows to set for DDRP packets sent by DDRP interface. It is used for security purpose. Possible values: N (MD5 authentication mode is disabled) or Y (MD5 authentication mode is enabled) or empty.The page has the following hyperlink:– Cancel: Allows to came back to the previous page without applying the user’s


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Bundle linkProcedures


5-51

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Bundle link

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Transmission option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Transmission page and click on Create Bundle link or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> TRANSMISSION: CPTRS -> BUNDLE: CPBNDL options in the Tree area, then in the CP TRANSMISSION Bundle Link page and click on the Create hyperlink. The CP BUNDLE Link Provision page appears:

Figure 5-32 Bundle link - Create page

The CP BUNDLE Link Provision panel contains:• Access Identifier: The entry field allows to select the Access Identifier that identifies

the access to the facility. A Bundle link composite port (BNDL) is a virtual port.• Link Administrative Status: The combo-box allows to select the administrative state

of the CP port. When it is in OFF then this port can't be used for CP services provisioning. Possible values: ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled).

• Port Class: The combo-box allows to user establishing on which link class the port belongs. Possible values:– UNI (default for GBE, VCG)– INNI (default for OCn, BNDL)– INTRA-DM-ENNI (default for ABSL)– INTER-DM-ENNI

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Bundle linkProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• Remote Facility Access Identifier: The entry field allows to specify an access to the facility on remote NE. This parameter must not be specified if DISCOVERY is set to ENABLED, otherwise it must be specified.

• Remote Router IP Address: The four entry fields allows to specify the neighbor router IP-ADDRESS. For component TE link, the value of this parameter will be inherited from bundle's REMOTE-ROUTERADDR. For not-component ports this parameter must not be specified if DISCOVERY is set to ENABLED, otherwise it must be specified. For component ports (i.e. when BUNDLE-AID is specified) this parameter must not be specified.


• Colour (hexadecimal): The entry field allows to specify the attribute of the TE link resource class. The resource class is a 32-bit field. This parameter isn't relevant when PORT-CLASS=UNI.


• RSVP Authentication: The combo-box allows to set for DDRP packets sent by DDRP interface. It is used for security purpose. Possible values: N (MD5 authentication mode is enabled) or Y (MD5 authentication mode is enabled) or empty.The page has the following hyperlink:– Cancel: Allows to come back to the previous page without applying the user’s


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Abstract linkProcedures


5-53

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Control Plane - Transmission: Create Abstract link

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Control Plane -> CP TDM -> Transmission option in the Menu bar, then in the CP Transmission page and click on Create Abstract link or........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Expand CTRLPLANE: CP -> TDM CP: CPTDM -> TRANSMISSION: CPTRS -> ABS: CPABS options in the Tree area, then in the CP TRANSMISSION Abstract Link page and click on the Create hyperlink. The CP ABSTRACT Link Provision page appears:

Figure 5-33 Abstract link - Create page

The CP ABSTRACT Link Provision panel contains:• Access Identifier: The entry field allows to select the Access Identifier that identifies

the access to the facility. An Abstract link composite port (ABSL) is a logical port.• Link Administrative Status: The combo-box allows to select the administrative state

of the CP port. When it is in OFF then this port can't be used for CP services provisioning. Possible values: ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled).

• Port Class: The entry field allows to user establishing on which link class the port belongs. Possible values:– UNI (default for GBE, VCG)– INNI (default for OCn, BNDL)– INTRA-DM-ENNI (default for ABSL)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– INTER-DM-ENNI• Remote Facility Access Identifier: The combo-box allows to specify an access to the

facility on remote NE. This parameter must not be specified if DISCOVERY is set to ENABLED, otherwise it must be specified.

• Remote Router IP Address: The four entry fields allows to specify the neighbor router IP-ADDRESS. For component TE link, the value of this parameter will be inherited from bundle's REMOTE-ROUTERADDR. For not-component ports this parameter must not be specified if DISCOVERY is set to ENABLED, otherwise it must be specified.

• Link Protection Type: The combo-box allows to specify the link protection type of the TE link. Descriptions of the different protection types can be found in the 'Routing Extensions in Support of Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS). This parameter is meaningful only for AID=ABSL-nnnnn. Possible values: NO (no protection) or 1+1 (protection 1+1) or empty.


• Colour (hexadecimal): The entry field allows to specify the attribute of the TE link resource class. The resource class is a 32 bits field. This parameter isn't relevant when PORT-CLASS=UNI.


• ENNI From Router Controller IP Address: The entry fields allows to specify the Router Controller IP address that if different from Local Router. If this parameter isn't provisioned then its value is the "Local Node IP Address". This parameter is relevant only when PORT-CLASS=INTRA-DM-ENNI or INTERDM-ENNI. This parameter is not relevant for component ports. If this parameter is provisioned then also the parameter ENNI To Router Controller IP Address must be provisioned.

• ENNI To Router Controller IP Address: The entry fields allows to specify the ENNI Link Remote side Router Controller IP address. This parameter is relevant only when PORT-CLASS=INTRA-DM-ENNI or INTER-DM-ENNI. This parameter is not relevant for component ports.

• RSVP Authentication: The combo-box allows to set for DDRP packets sent by DDRP interface. It is used for security purpose. Possible values: N (MD5 authentication mode is enabled) or Y (MD5 authentication mode is enabled) or empty.The page has the following hyperlinks:



5-55

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

– Cancel: Allows to come back to the previous page without applying the user’s operation.

– Save: Applies the user’s operation in this page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create LAGProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create LAG

Purpose

The system supports the Link Aggregation (LAG) at the Ethernet side, as specified in IEEE Std. 802.3ad-2000; it is a technique to aggregate many data streams into a single logical link. The resulting aggregate link will be treated by the system (with regard to instances about IGMP, network protections, etc.), as a single link. It permits to overcome the bandwidth limitation of the single ethernet interfaces, or to protect the traffic.

Permitted port rates to be aggregated are 1 Gbps and 10 Gbps (10 Mbps and 100 Mbps are for future release). The max number of ports (LAG-size) to be aggregated is 16; (LAG stands for Link Aggregation Group). Links may be anytime added or removed to/from the bundle. Ports to be aggregated can be either located on the same board and also on different boards.

Its management in the network is based upon the communication, between the aggregate partner pieces of equipment, of LACP messages (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). The LACP packets transport information about set-up, aggregation capability, links failures, automatic reconfiguration after failure, etc. The benefits of Link Aggregation feature are:• Bandwidth limitation overcoming.• Load balancing (the traffic is distributed over the constituting links).• Reliability increasing (in case that a link of the aggregate fails, its traffic will be

automatically distributed over the other links of the aggregate).

The conditions for Link Aggregation option are the followings:• All involved ports must work at the same rate.• All involved ports must have the same configurations, regarding AutoNegotiation and

Flow Control.• All aggregated links must be point-to-point (Multicast is not allowed).• All involved interfaces must work in full-duplex modality.• All involved ports must be Local (Remote ports are not allowed).• Actor and Partner ports (local and far sides) must be of the same type.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select AM node from the Tree area as shown in Figure 5-34. The Link Aggregation MN window is displayed in the client area as shown in Figure 5-35.



5-57

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-34 Aggregation management tree

Figure 5-35 Link aggregation management

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Table 5-7 “Link aggregation parameters” provides description of Link Aggregation Creation panel parameters:

Table 5-7 Link aggregation parameters


Name Allows to set the name of the LAG; the only suffix after “#” can be set by the user, with an integer in the 1 to 123 range

Admin State This item can be set only after creation, in “Configure Aggregator” option,. The values are:• enable the LAG is in-service• disable the LAG is out-of-service

User Label Allows to indicate the LAG by means of a name defined by the user.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Size Allows to set the size of the LAG, i.e. number of Aggregated Ports; possible values are integers in the 1 to 16 range

Actor Admin Key Allows to indicate the LAG “Key”, the parameter identifying this LAG; integer in the 0 to 123 range

Type Refers about the type of port (read only field, fixed by the system to ieee8023adLag)

EthClient Type (read only field)

Indicates the transported layer. The values are:• ets: for Ethernet Transparent System• etb: for Ethernet Bridge System

Actor System Priority Allows to indicate the LAG Priority. This parameter, together with the LAG Mac-Address, forms the “System Identifier”. The lowest System Identifier value will be elected as the “Master” of the link, i.e. the one that will drive the actions in case of events such as failures, switches, etc. The valid range is 0-65535

ASAP Name Allows to set a name of alarms profile to be associated to the current Port. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection procedure. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported

MTU (Maximum Transmit Unit)

Allows to set the size of the largest packet which can be sent on this LAG interface, specified in octets. The values are integers in the 1574 to 9216 range

VLAN Protocol Profile Allows to chose one of the existing VLAN Profile or setting don’t care

Encaps Method Refers about the method of MAC packets encapsulation inside the underlying physical layer. The options are:• ethernetV2: default mode, set by the system• IEEE8023: not yet operative

LACP Enabled The values are True or False

LACP Type Indicates if the Link Aggregation Control Protocol is ON (i.e. lacpOn is active on this aggregator) or OFF (IacpOff inactive); read only field, fixed by the system

Layer2 control frame (0x) The entry field permits to enable or disable the Protocol Frames that can accede to this port. The allowable value can be selected by means of the Bitmask details hyperlink




5-59

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Save hyperlink that applies the user’s operation in this page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Traffic Descriptor- DataProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Traffic Descriptor- Data

Purpose

Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320/160) ZIC (Zero-Installation Craft Terminal) Data supports (in mutually exclusive mode) the following workings modalities:• General Bridge Management modalities:

bridge 802.1Q: for Virtual bridge functions

The function of this option is to show the existing traffic descriptions related to the ETS traffic, or to create a new one, to display the details about a selected one, and also to delete one of them. This same dialog is also always recalled by the other Transmission applications, when the association of a Traffic Descriptor (TD) to the relevant resource is needed.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Data -> Traffic Desc in the application Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on Create to configure a new Traffic Descriptor. The following page appears:

Figure 5-36 Traffic Desc Page

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Traffic desc panel describes the following parameters:

The function of this option is to show the existing traffic descriptions related to the ETS traffic, or to create a new one, to display the details about a selected one, and also to delete one of them. This same dialog is also always recalled by the other Transmission applications, when the association of a Traffic Descriptor (TD) to the relevant resource is needed. –



5-61

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Table 5-8 “Traffic descriptor parameters” provides description of Traffic descriptor panel parameters:

Table 5-8 Traffic descriptor parameters


User Label Indicates the label for Traffic Descriptor

Service Type Indicates the Traffic codification, according to international standard conversion:best Effort Service - serves Low priority traffic, which relies on transport layer protocol (per OSI stack) to recover from loss and tolerates large delay; e.g. E-mail and file transfer applications. Best Effort denotes BW (PIR > CIR = 0 in 100kbps increments), which may or may not be available per network operator’s reservation for Best Effort policy. It may therefore be unavailable under congestion conditionsbackGroundServiceregulatedService - serves Medium priority traffic, which relies on transport layer protocol (per OSI stack) to recover from occasional loss and requires moderate delay; e.g. client–server applications. Regulated service denotes BW (PIR > CIR >0 in 100Kbps increments), which may be overbooked per network operator’s overbooking policy. The portion of bandwidth between CIR and PIR (aka EIR) may therefore be partially available under congestion conditions.regulatedService1regulatedService3regulatedService4 guaranteedService - serves High priority traffic for mission critical applications that require loss–less delivery and minimal delay. Guaranteed SLA denotes BW (CIR = PIR > 0 in 100Kbps increments), that is always available regardless of any congestion conditions. Traffic delivered using Guaranteed BW, is policed to the CIR value with a burst window equal to the CBS.

guaranteedService2

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Cancel to delete the selected Traffic Descriptor.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Save & Exit to create a new Traffic Descriptor in the following described and leave the page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Save & Continue to create a new Traffic Descriptor in the following described and create another one.

CIR -Committed Information Rate [kb/sec] This is the normal medium rate (expressed in kb/sec) of the data flow (Effective Bandwidth) and it ranges from 0 to PIR value. It can be set only if the regulatedService has been selected; in bestEffortService case it is set to 0 by the system; in guaranteedService case it is set equal to PIR value

PIR - Peak Information Rate [kb/sec] This is the maximum rate (expressed in kb/sec) up to which the source can transmit for a short time period and it ranges from 3 to physical-line-rate of the relative Port

CBS - Committed Burst Size [bytes] This is the committed number of bytes for which the source may transmit the PIR; it ranges from 0 to 64 MBytes. It can be set only if the regulatedService traffic has been selected; in besEffortService case it is set to 0 by the system; in guaranteedService case it is set equal to PBS value. A value greater than MTU (e.g. 2000) is advisable

PBS - Peak Burst Size [bytes] This is the maximum number of bytes for which the source may transmit the PIR; it ranges from 1 to 64 MBytes (this max value cannot be greater than the minimum value of 64 MB or 256xCBS. I.e.: if CBS=2000, then PBS< 512 kB). A value greater than MTU (e.g. 2000) is advisable

Rate Specifies the bit rate for the multicast and unknown traffic

Service type Specifies the type of service for the multicast and unknown traffic




5-63

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

When this dialog is recalled by a resource configuration, it displays the additional keys “Apply" (to associate the selected Traffic Descriptor to the resource), and “Cancel" (to exit without TD association).

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create VLANProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create VLAN

Purpose

VLAN proprieties could be modified. Clicking the VLAN hyperlink (e.g. untagged ETHLocPort#2) the following web page is brought out.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Data -> VLAN profile options in the Menu bar as shown in Figure 5-37.

Figure 5-37 VLAN profile

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Create to configure a new VLAN profile as shown in Figure 5-38.

Figure 5-38 VLAN protocol profile

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-9 “VLAN protocol profile parameters” provides description of VLAN Protocol Profile panel parameters:

Table 5-9 VLAN protocol profile parameters


User Label Allows to digit a mnemonic string to address the VLAN

Create VLANProcedures


5-65

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Cancel to cancel the operation and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save & continue to apply the changes and continue the configuration process.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Save & Exit to apply the changes and the following page appears.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Ethernet Type (0x) Allows to digit an hexadecimal value for the provider protocol-type (PT) that is inserted into the 2-bytes field of the Stacked-VLAN shim header; the value identifies the network provider and has to be 2-bytes long in hexadecimal notation; the third non-included byte is forced by default to “0x”. The PT is used to recognize the type of afferent VLAN frames, i.e. if they are “S-Vlan-tagged” or others; by default, an hex value of 88A8 is interpreted as S-Vlan tagged. Frames with PT value different than this will be treated as non-SVlan-tagged. An hex value of 8100 is interpreted as Q-Vlan tagged. Other values of PT will be interpreted as generic Stacked-Vlan frames, used to interwork among different network providers


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create color profileProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create color profile

Purpose

Use this procedure to create a new color profile.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Color Profile from the Data menu.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Color Profile tab displays the table that contains the existing color profiles.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Create to configure a new color profile as shown in Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39 Color profile creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Table 5-10 “Color profile parameters” provides description of Color Profile panel parameters:

Table 5-10 Color profile parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Cancel to unsave the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Save & Exit to save the settings and return to the previous page.

Parameters Description

User Label Specifies the label for the new color profile

Priority Bits 0 to 7 Specifies the priority bits. The valid range is 0-7

Create color profileProcedures


5-67

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Save & Continue to save the settings and continue to create another color profile.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create ASAP listProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create ASAP list

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure a new ASAP list.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Data -> ASAP List from the menu bar as shown in Figure 5-40.

Figure 5-40 ASAP window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Show ghost objects to activate the ghost objects.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Create to configure a new ASAP list as shown in Figure 5-41.

Figure 5-41 New ASAP

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the new Asap Label in the entry box as shown in the Create ASAP panel.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Create to create a new ASAP label as shown in Figure 5-42.

Create ASAP listProcedures


5-69

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-42 ASAP contd.

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Cancel to cancel the settings and return to the previous panel.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create DCC ChannelProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create DCC Channel

Purpose

Use this procedure to create a new DCC channel.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select XCom -> DCC -> Network IF from the menu bar as shown in Figure 5-43.

Figure 5-43 DCC channel

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button to select the previously created DDC Channel entries from the table.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The fields in NE Interface Details panel are displayed according to the value TERMINATED or CROSSCONNECTED of DCC Mode as shown in Figure 5-44 and Figure 5-45 respectively.



5-71

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-44 DCC Mode - TERMINATED

Figure 5-45 DCC Mode - CROSSCONNECTED

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Table 5-11 “DCC channel - NE interface details parameters” provides description of NE Interface Details panel parameters:

Table 5-11 DCC channel - NE interface details parameters


Access Identifier Specifies the Access Identifier of a resource for the selected port

Lower Layer Mode Specifies the protocol used for the Layer 2 over the specified DCC. The values are:• LAPD• PPP

OSI Protocol Specifies if the OSI protocol runs on the addressed DCC or not. The values are:• Y- Yes• N- No

DCC Mode Specifies the DCC Mode for the NE interface. The default value is CROSSCONNECTED

Internet Protocol Specifies the Internet Protocol for the network interface

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save to store all the settings and click Create to configure a new DCC Channel as shown in Figure 5-46.

Figure 5-46 DCC channel - filter by

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select the AID type from the combo-box to filter DCC Channel that the user wants to configure.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Search to filter the DCC Channel.

Figure 5-47 DCC channel - filter by (contd.)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the radio button to select the filtered DCC Channel and click Apply & Exit to configure a new Network Interface as shown in Figure 5-48.

Layer 2 Specifies the Layer 2 options. The values are:• USER• NETWORK

DCC Channel Specifies the reference of DCC Channel. The values are:• LINE• SECTION




5-73

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-48 Create new network interface

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Table 5-12 “DCC channel - new NE interface parameters” provides description of New Network Interface panel parameters:

Table 5-12 DCC channel - new NE interface parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Cancel to revoke all the settings and return to the previous page.


Access Identifier Specifies the Access Identifier of a resource for the selected port

Lower Layer Mode Specifies the protocol used for the Layer 2 over the specified DCC. The values are:• LAPD• PPP

OSI Protocol Specifies if the OSI protocol runs on the addressed DCC or not. The values are:• Y• N

DCC Mode Specifies the DCC Mode for the NE interface. The default value is TERMINATED

Internet Protocol Specifies the Internet Protocol for the network interface

DCC Channel Specifies the reference of DCC Channel. The values are:• LINE• SECTION

Integrated ISIS Specifies if the Integrated IS protocol is running on the addressed DCC or not. The values are:• Y• N

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click Save to store all the settings and return to the previous page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Create XC OverheadProcedures


5-75

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create XC Overhead

Purpose

Use this procedure to create overhead channel cross-connection.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select XCom -> DCC -> XC Overhead from the menu bar as shown in Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49 Overhead channel cross-connection

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Create to configure a new Overhead Channel Cross-Connection as shown in Figure 5-50.

Figure 5-50 Overhead channel cross-connection - enter channel

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-13 “Enter channel parameters” provides description of Enter Channel panel parameters:

Table 5-13 Enter channel parameters


DCC CHNL Specifies the reference of the DCC Channel. The values are:• LINE• SECTION

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create XC OverheadProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Select to choose source and the destination to configure a cross-connection as shown in Figure 5-51.

Figure 5-51 DCC_SELECTION window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the radio button to select the DCC Channel from the table and click Select to confirm the selection and return to the previous panel as shown in Figure 5-50.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Save to store all the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

From Specifies the source for the cross-connection

To Specifies the destination for the cross-connection


Create ASAPProcedures


5-77

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create ASAP

Purpose

This procedure allows to create an Alarm Severity Assigned Profile (ASAP) instance for a given profile type. The ASAP is created as a clone of the factory default ASAP of the given type.

The system can support up to 256 total instances of ASAP for all entity types. Note, however, that for OCn facilities, creating a new TL1 instance of an ASAP will use up two (2) internal instances, thus reducing the total number of remaining available ASAP instances by two.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Alarms -> ASAP Mng options in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on Create ASAPs hyperlink and the following page appears.

Figure 5-52 ASAP Creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-14 “ASAP CREATE Parameters” provides description of ASAP Create panel parameters:

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create ASAPProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-14 ASAP CREATE Parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Cancel to revoke all the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save & Exit to store all the settings and return to the previous page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S


ASAP Type Lists all the available ASAP type, but without the prefix ASAP. The allowable values are:• ALL = all alarms• EQPT = equipment alarms• COM = common parts alarms• BITS = synchronism alarms• SECU = administration security alarms• OCn = OCn (where n = 3, 12, 48 or 192)

alarms• STSn = STSn (where n = 1, 3c, 12c, 48c or

192c) alarms• GBE = Gigabit Ethernet alarms• 10GBE = 10 Gigabit Ethernet alarms• 10GFC = 10 Generic Flow Control alarms• VCG = Virtual Concatenation Group

alarms• ODU2 = ODU2 port alarms• OTU2 = OTU2 port alarms• OCHPORT = Optical Channel port alarms• OTSPORT = Optical Transmission Section

port alarms• OSCPORT = Optical Supervisory Channel

port alarms

Default Allows to indicate whether the ASAP will become the default ASAP for that ASAP type or not. The allowable value are: “Y” or “N”.

User Label Digit a mnemonic string of the ASAP.

Create IGMPProcedures


5-79

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IGMP

Purpose

IP hosts to report their host group memberships to any immediately neighboring multicast routers use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), a multicasting protocol in the Internet protocols family. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP datagram, with an IP protocol number of 2. IGMP has versions IGMP v1, v2 and v3.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Data -> IGMP Mng options in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on the Create hyperlink and the following panel appears.

Figure 5-53 IGMP Creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-15 “IGMP Configuration Panel Parameters” provides description of the IGMP Configuration Panel Parameters.

Table 5-15 IGMP Configuration Panel Parameters


VLAN ID The entry field allows to choose the Vlan to be associated to the IGMP instance. The Select hyperlink allows for the selection of the resource. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

Query Max Response Time [1/10s] The adjustable field allows to set the max amount of time (in 1/10sec.) for the users (hosts) to respond to a query from the Ethernet Bridge-“Proxy” (or from the IP Router).

IGMP Status The entry field allows to digit if node is enabled to support the IGMP function. Possible values: up or down; “up” means that this 1850 TSS-320 node is enabled to support the IGMP function.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Last Memb Query Count [1/10s] The adjustable field (LMQC) allows to set the number of counts of next parameter “LastMemberQueryInterval”, for the IP Router, before it establishes that no other member of this IGMP group is present and thus removing the multicast transmission.

Proxy Report Enabling The possible values are “enabled” or “disabled”.• enable means that this VLAN delegates the

Node (acting as Proxy) to report to the Router one summarized collective message, together with the other VLAN’s involved in the same IGMP group.

• disable means that this VLAN is not interested in the collective Proxy reporting. In this case all the reports from the members of the IGMP group are forwarded transparently to the router.

Last Memb Query Interval [1/10s] The adjustable field (LMQ) allows to set the time interval, for the IP Router, between the queries sent from the Router to the users, to check if any other member is present on this IGMP group.

Note: The product of the two previous parameters (LMQC*LMQI) gives the time, for the IP Router, to establish that no other member of this IGMP group is present and thus removing the multicast transmission.

Group Member Interval [s] The entry field allows to digit the amount of time (in sec.) after which the IP router can check if no other member of this IGMP group is interested in the multicast transmission, if no Report from users is sent in this interval.

Snoopy Proxy Version [s] The possible values are:• V1: It supports the IGMP Query from the

Router and the Reports from users.• V2: It supports, in addition to V1 features,

the fast leave of a user from the IGMP group.

Router Timeout [s] The entry field allows to digit the time interval (in sec.) for the node for dynamic refresh of the list of existing IP Multicast Routers. After this time, not alive Routers are deleted from the

list.




5-81

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Cancel to revoke all the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IP tunnelProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IP tunnel

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to create an IP tunnel instance on the NE. The IP tunnel that has to be created is specified by its AID.

The supported encapsulation of the IP tunnel is the Alcatel-Lucent proprietary type: both Standard (RFC3147) and CISCO proprietary encapsulation protocol types are not supported.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Xcom -> IP Tunnel option from the menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create hyperlink, the Network Element IP TUNNEL CREATION window appears:

Figure 5-54 Network Element IP TUNNEL CREATION window

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-16 “Network Element IP Tunnel configuration parameters” provides the description of IP Tunnel Configuration panel parameters:

Table 5-16 Network Element IP Tunnel configuration parameters


Access Identifier IP Tunnel Identifier. Indicates the identifier of the specific IP tunnel to create. Allowable values are in the 1 - 128 range.

Remote TID (TL1 SID of the IP Tunnel target NE.) The Target NE must be reachable via OSI over DCC and the NSAP address corresponding to this TID must be able to be retrievable from the TARP cache. Allowable values are: <1-20 VALID TID CHARACTERS> or "<1-20 VALID TID CHARACTERS>". If the value contains non-alphanumeric characters, it has to be enclosed in double quotes.

Create IP tunnelProcedures


5-83

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save to store all the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Close to revoke all the settings and return to the previous page.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IP routeProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create IP route

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure the IP Routing.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Xcom -> Network Domain -> IP Route option from the menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create hyperlink, the IP Routing window appears:

Figure 5-55 IP routing creation Page

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-17 “IP routing parameters” provides the description of IP Routing panel parameters:

Table 5-17 IP routing parameters


Access Identifier Access Identifier, it specifies the STSn facility carrying the DCC with the next hop network interface or identifies the IP Tunnel or Customer LAN. The select hyperlink allows to open the window shown in “Click Cancel to revoke all the settings and return to the previous page.” (p. 5-85) for the selection of the resource. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

Create IP routeProcedures


5-85

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save & Exit to save the settings and return to the window.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Save to store the settings and return to the previous panel.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


Figure 5-56 IP routing selection

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select one of the check box and clicking on Send hyperlink, the choice are added in the relevant field of the previous page. Cancel hyperlink allows to leave the window.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Destination Address This is the IP address of the destination host or network (in the format nnn-nnn-nnn-nnn). The address 0-0-0-0 is used to specify a default route. If NETMASK is not all '1' (i.e., a network route is specified), the host portion of the DESTADDR must be all '0'

Subnet Mask This is the IP subnet mask of the route (in the format nnn-nnn-nnn-nnn). The mask 0-0-0-0 is used to specify a default route

Metric This is the cost metric of the route. The valid range is 1- 65535

Advertise Specifies whether the IP route is leaked into IP routing protocols ( Integrated IS-IS). Allowable values: N (route is only known on the local NE) or Y (route is leaked into integrated IS-IS)


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Gateway Map TableProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create Gateway Map Table

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to change a static entry in the TL1 Gateway mapping table. The TL1 Gateway mapping table associates Target Identifiers (TIDs) with IP address / raw terminal port pairs. Note that at least one of these two parameters (IP address and raw terminal port) shall be provided.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Xcom -> Network Domain -> Gateway Map Table option in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create hyperlink, the ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY window appears:

Figure 5-57 ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY Page

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-18 “ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY Parameters” provides the description of the window panel.

Table 5-18 ENTER GATEWAY MAP TABLE ENTRY Parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................



NE TID (Network Element Target Identifier)

It is the TID of the NE to be changed in the Gateway mapping table.

IP ADDRESS (Internet Protocol address)

It is the IP address (in the format nnn-nnn-nnn-nnn) of the remote NE in the mapping table entry.

PORT (IP Port) It is the associated IP port of the TL1 raw-mode server on the remote NE to be changed in the mapping table.

Create Gateway Map TableProcedures


5-87

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create TCA profileProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create TCA profile

Purpose

This procedure allows to create a new Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) profile instance of a specified profile type. The new instance of TCAP is created as a clone of the factory default TCAP of the specified type.

The system can support up to 128 total instances of TCA profile for all facility types. Note, however, that for STSn facilities, creating a new TL1 instance of a TCA Profile will use up two (2) internal instances, thus reducing the total number of remaining available TCA profiles by two.

The access identifier is assigned by the NE with a sequence index number starting from 2, because indexes 0 and 1 are respectively used for the null and factory default TCAP, for each TCAP type.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Alarm -> TCA Profile option from the Menu bar as shown in Figure 5-58.

Figure 5-58 TCA profile

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Table 5-19 “Filter panel parameters” provides the description of Filter panel parameters.



5-89

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-19 Filter panel parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click TCA Profile identifier radio button to select the available TCA Access Identifier.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click User Label radio button to enter the label for the TCA profile.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Search to filter the data based on the criteria or click Create to configure a new TCA profile as shown in Figure 5-59.


Profile Type Specifies the following profiles to select as filter criteria. The values are:• blank = none• GBE10 = 10 Gigabit Ethernet profiles• GBE= Gigabit Ethernet profiles• GFC10 = 10 Generic Flow Control profiles• OCn = OCn (where n = 3, 12, 48 or 192)

profiles• OCHPORT = Optical Channel port profiles• ODU2 = ODU2 port profiles• OSCPORT = Optical Supervisory Channel

port profiles• OTSPORT = Optical Transmission Section

port profiles• OTU2 = OTU2 port profiles

TCA Identifier Specifies the TCA access identifier.

User Label Specifies the Label of the TCA profile.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-59 TCA profile creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Table 5-20 “TCP profile parameters” provides the description of Create TCA Profile panel parameters:

Table 5-20 TCP profile parameters

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Save & Exit to save the settings and return to the window.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Save to save the settings and create another TCA Profile.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S


Profile Type The associated combo-box lists all the TCA profile type which new instance is being created.

User Label It is an entry field which identifies the user label assigned to a TCA profile instance. The value can be entered is < 1-40 VALID USERLABEL CHARACTERS >, the default value is LBL-THP<PFTYPE>-index (where index represents the numerical identifier n=2,.,n of the TCAP instance being created)

Default The associated combo-box allows to select the flag that allows user to promote the modified TCA profile to a default profile for the profile type it is part of. The allowable values are: Y or N.

Create APSProcedures


5-91

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create APS

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to create a 1+1 Linear APS (Automatic Protection System defined in GR-253-CORE) where the OC-n ports must be configured on an adjacent pair of cards, with the Protected/West port in the lower numbered slot and Protecting/East port in the next higher numbered slot. For optical modules that support multiple ports, the port numbers specified must be same for both the working and the protection entities.

In this release, Linear 1+1 APS operates in UNIdirectional mode with no automatic reversion.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Protection -> APS options in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create hyperlink APS Configuration Panel appears:

Figure 5-60 APS creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-21 “APS Configuration Panel Parameters” provides the description of APS Configuration Panel Parameters.

Table 5-21 APS Configuration Panel Parameters


FFP Access Identifier It is referenced to the protected entity in the FFP (Fast Facility Protection) group. The protecting entity is automatically taken as the same port on the next adjacent module.

Protected Access Identifier It is the Access Identifier of the West/Working/Preferred member of the FFP. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection process. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create APSProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save to save the settings and return to the previous page.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................


........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Protecting Access Identifier It is the Access identifier of the East/Protection/Alternate member of the FFP.


Create UPSRProcedures


5-93

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create UPSR

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to create an FFP that associates a Protecting or East OC-192 facility with a Protected or West facility. When multiple facilities are supported by module, grouping facility number on EAST and the facility number on the WEST module must be same. i.e., port 1 OCn facility on EAST must be paired with port 1 WEST. Similarly port 2 on EAST must be paired with port 2 on WEST facility to form a BLSR2 group.

For UPSR, the STS1/STSxC facilities within the OC-n that is designated to be the Protected/WEST facility are designated as the Preferred facilities. The STS1/STSxC facilities within the OC-n that is designated to be the Protecting/EAST facility are designated as the alternate STS1/STSxC facilities. The preferred/alternate designation can be modified via the ENT-CRS and ED-CRS- commands.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Protection -> UPSR options in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create the following panel appears:

Figure 5-61 UPSR Creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The panel has the same parameters as described in Table 5-21 “APS Configuration Panel Parameters”.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................



........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create BLSRProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create BLSR

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to create a Protecting or West OCn (OC3, OC12, OC48 and OC192) facility with a Protected or East facility. The UPSR (Unidirectional Path Switched Ring) facility protection groups can be provisioned on a port-pair basis. For UPSR, the STS1/STSxC facilities within the OCn that is designated to be the Protected/WEST facility are designated as the Preferred facilities. The STS1/STSxC facilities within the OCn that is designated to be the Protecting/EAST facility are designated as the alternate STS1/STSxC facilities.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Protection -> BLSR options in the Menu bar.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clicking on Create the following panel appears:

Figure 5-62 BLSR Creation

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Table 5-22 “BLSR Panel Parameters” provides the description of BLSR Panel Parameters.

Table 5-22 BLSR Panel Parameters


FFP Access Identifier It is referenced to the protected entity in the FFP (Fast Facility Protection) group. The protecting entity is automatically taken as the same port on the next adjacent module.

Create BLSRProcedures


5-95

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................



........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Protected Access Identifier It is the Access Identifier of the West/Working/Preferred member of the FFP. The Select hyperlink allows to start the selection process. After the selection procedure, the chosen value will be reported.

Protecting Access Identifier It is the Access identifier of the East/Protection/Alternate member of the FFP.

Revert Delay Time This parameter is only applicable to non-pass-through cross-connections. By means of the combo-box, it is possible to chose the time in a 0 to 15 seconds range, the default value is 5 seconds.

Local Node Identifier This parameter identifies the node identifier of the BLSR node. By means of the combo-box, it is possible to chose the identifier number in a 0 to 15 range, the default value is the previously existing value.

Node Description Describes the Node.


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision STS Cross ConnectionProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision STS Cross Connection

Purpose

This procedure allows the operator to create a STS Cross Connection. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board to be provisioned from the Tree Area (Example: 10GSO - 1P10GSO). The following page appears.

Figure 5-63 Provision Board (10GSO-1-1-4)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Resource XFP-1-1-4-1: XI-641 (in this example) from bottom of the panel page dislayed in “Provision Board (10GSO-1-1-4)” (p. 5-96). The following page appears.



5-97

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-64 Provision Module (XFP-1-1-4-1: XI-641)

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the Resource OC192-1-1-4-1 (in this example) from bottom of the panel page dislayed in “Provision Module (XFP-1-1-4-1: XI-641)” (p. 5-97). The following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-65 Provision Port OC192-1-1-4-1f

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Clicking on STS in the option bar as shown in the “Provision Port OC192-1-1-4-1f” (p. 5-98). The following page appears.



5-99

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-66 Specify an STS Panel

Refer to “STS functional tab” (p. 4-45)........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Clicking on Continue as shown in the Figure 5-66 the following page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-67 Modify STS Page

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clicking on New Conn tab as shown in the Figure 5-67 the below page appears.



5-101

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-68 Xconnection Panel

The XConnection panel displays the following options:• Direction: This field is used to choose if the selected STSn access identifier is the

From or To field of cross connection.• Connection type: This field is use to choose the provisioning of a Cross Connection

or a Conference. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clicking on Continue tab as shown in the Figure 5-68 the below page appears.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-69 Provision Cross Connection Panel

Table 5-23 Provision Cross Connection Panel Parameters


From It indicates the FROM (receive side from the network) port of the cross-connection.

To It indicates the TO (transmit side to the network) port of the cross-connection.



5-103

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cross Connect Type1 It indicates the type of cross-connection. The possible values are: • One-way(1WAY): One-Way, identifies an

unidirectional connection between the selected FROM and TO facility ports.

• One-Way Path Protected Ring(1WAYPR): Identifies a cross connect in which a protected path is dropped from a UPSR Ring. No path is added.

• One-Way Pass Through Ring(1WAYTHRU) • Two-way(2WAY): Two-Way, identifies an atomic bi-

directional connection between the selected FROM and TO facility ports.

• Two-Way Path Protected Ring(2WAYPR): Two-Way Path Ring. Delete a two-way path ring cross connection between the FROM and TO ports that are embedded within OC-n that are defined to be in UPSR relationship.

• Two-Way Drop-and-Continue Ring-to-Ring (2WAYDCRR): Identifies a double bi-directional Drop and Continue cross-connection between the selected FROM on one ring and the selected TO on the second ring. Used for dual node ring interconnect.

• Bidirectional ring pass-through(THRU)

Cross Connect Type2 It indicates the second ring cross-connection type (for dual ring interconnect only). The possible values are:• Two-way(2WAY)• Two-Way Path Protected Ring(2WAYPR)

Circuit Identifier It indicates the FROM-TO or To-FROM circuit ID previously assigned to cross-connection. The possible values are: < 1-45 VALID CKTID CHARACTERS >.

Preferred It indicates the preferred direction for a cross-connect selector function.

Switch on UNEQ-P It indicates whether or not to switch when an UNEQ-P condition occurs. This parameter is only applicable to non-pass-through cross-connections in UPSR. The possible values are: N (do not switch on UNEQ-P) or Y (switch on UNEQ-P).

Revert It indicates whether or not to make revert to working once the working comes into service and the traffic is on protect. This parameter is only applicable to non-pass-through cross-connections in UPSR. The possible values are: N (do not revert to working/preferred) or Y (revert to working/preferred).


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Revert delay time (min) It indicates the revert delay time (when the next column refers Y) in minutes. The possible values are in the 0 to 15 minutes range.

Preferred 2 It indicates the preferred direction for a cross-connect selector function for the dual interconnected ring (ring 2) with UPSR non-pass-through cross-connections.

Switch on UNEQ-P 2 It indicates whether or not to switch when an UNEQ-P condition occurs on ring 2. This parameter is only applicable to non-pass-through cross-connections in UPSR. The possible values are: N (do not switch on UNEQ-P) or Y (switch on UNEQ-P).

Revert 2 It indicates whether or not to make revert mode automatic on the dual interconnected ring (ring 2). This parameter is only applicable to non-pass-through cross-connections in UPSR. The possible values are: N (do not revert to working/preferred) or Y (revert to working/preferred).

Revert delay time 2 [min] It indicates the revert delay time for ring 2 (when the next column refers Y) in minutes. The possible values are in the 0 to 15 minutes range.

Save Allows the User to save the settings.


Provision ConferenceProcedures


5-105

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision Conference

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 For provisioning of conference repeat the steps 1 to 5 as of provisioning of STS Crossconnection.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on Continue as shown in the Figure 5-66 and select Conference for the Connection Type option, the following page appears.

Figure 5-70 Connection Type - Conference

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on Continue as shown in the Figure 5-70 the following page appears.

Figure 5-71 Provision Conference

The Provision Conference Panel has the following items:• Master

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision ConferenceProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

• To• SET From To Circuit Identifier

The Panel has the Save hyperlink to save the settings.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click on Save to save the settings.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S

Change the date and time of the Network ElementProcedures


5-107

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change the date and time of the Network Element

Purpose

This procedure allows the user to set the date and time independently of the NTP feature.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select System Management -> Network Time Protocol options in the Menu bar. The following screen appears.

Figure 5-72 NTP Config

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Time and Date panel displays the current date and current time as shown in Figure 5-72. ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Date and Time options allows to manually set the system date and time by means of six combo-boxes Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Sec as shown in Figure 5-72.

Note: This command is not allowed if NTP is enabled.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Change the date and time of the Network ElementProcedures


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Save to save the new date and time settings.

........................................................................................................................................................E N D O F S T E P S


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Abbreviations

Overview

Purpose

This document contains the list of terms used in the document.

ABBREVIATION MEANING

ABIL Enabling

ABN Abnormal

ACD Access Control Domain

ACL Access Control List

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AIM Alarm Indication Message

AIS Alarm indication Signal

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photodiode

APS Automatic Protection Switching

AND Alarm on both station batteries

APD Avalanche Photodiode

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

AS Alarm Surveillance

ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Module

ATTD Attended (alarm storing)

AU Administrative Unit

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OverviewAbbreviations


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AUX Auxiliary

AU4 Administrative unit - level 4

B&W Black and White

BATT Battery

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit Interleaved Parity

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

BW BandWidth

C Storing command

CAC Connection Admission Control

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CD Current Data

CD-ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory

CE European Conformity

CE Customer Edge (device)

CIR Committed Information Rate

CO Central Office

COMD Colorless Optical Mux/Demux circuit pack.

CoS Class of Service

CP Control Plane

CPI Incoming parallel contacts

CPO Outgoing parallel contacts

CPU Central Processing Unit (referred to Controller equipment unit or Microprocessor)

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CSF Client Signal Failure

CSPF Constraint-based Shortest Path First

CT Craft Terminal

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCCM Data Communication Channels Multiplex

DCCR Data Communication Channels Regeneration

DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment




6-3

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitoring

DEG Signal Degraded

DEMUX Demultiplexer

DS Differentiated Service

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DVB Digital Video Broadcast

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E-NNI External - Network Node Interface

EC Equipment Controller

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

EML Element Management Layer

EMS Element Management System

EPD Early Packets Discarding

EPS Equipment Protection Switching

ERO Explicit Route Object

ES Ethernet Switch

ETB Ethernet Bridge

ETS Ethernet Transparent Service (or Ethernet Transport Service)

ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute

EXP MPLS Experimental field

F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse

FA Forwarding Adjacency

FCS Frame Check-Sum

FDB Filtering Data Base

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class

FLC First Level Controller

FOADM Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMPLS Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching

GND Ground

GNE Gateway Network Element

GOSIP Government Open System Interconnection Profile

GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation

HK Housekeeping

HO Higher Order

HTCT High Order Tandem Connection Termination

ICS Item Change Status

ID Identification signals

ID Identifier

IF InFlow

I/F Interface

I/O Input/Output

ICS Item Change Status

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IGP Interior Gateway Protocol

ILA In Line Amplifier

IN Input

INT Internal Local Alarms

IP Internet Protocol

IPCP IP Control Protocol

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ITU-T (*) International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCP Link Control Protocol




6-5

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LDP Label Distribution Protocol

LED Light emitting diode

LO Lower Order

LOA Lower Order Assembler

LOF Loss of Frame alignment

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

LOP Loss Of Pointer

LOS Loss of Signal

LSA Link State Advertisement

LSP Label Switched Path

M Tagblock or Alarm storing

MA Maintenance Association

MAC Media Acces Control

MAU Medium Access Unit

MD Maintenance Domain

MIB Management Information Base

MPLS MultiProtocol label Switching

MRU Maximum Receive Unit

MS Multiplex Section

MSA Multiplex section adaptation

MSB Most Significant Bit

MSP Multiplex section protection

MTU Maximum Transmit Unit

MUX Multiplexer

NE Network Element

NMS Network Management System

NNI Network to Network Interface

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

ODUk Optical channel Data Unit, capacity k=1, 2, 3

OF OutFlow

OH Overhead


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

OMD Optical Mux/Demux circuit pack

OR Logic sum/Loss of only one station battery

OS Operating system

OS Operations System

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

OSI Open System Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OT Optical Transponder/Translator

OUT Output

P2MP Point To Multi-Point

P2P Point To Point

PC Personal Computer

PCS Physical Coding Sub-layer

PD PhotoDetector. Several figures use PD to indicate photodetectors that are provided in optical amplifier modules

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PIM Plug In Module

PIR Peak Information Rate

PLM PayLoad Mismatch

PPI Plesiochronous Physical interface

POH Path Overhead

PM Performance Monitoring

POH Path Overhead

PPI Plesiochronous Physical interface

PPP Point to Point Protocol

PSC Packet Switch Capable

QoS Quality of Service

RA Received Aggregate or Routing Adjacency

RAM Random Access Memory

RDI Remote Defect Indication




6-7

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RED Random Early Discarding

RFC Request For Comment

RI Remote Inventory

RST Regenerator Section Termination

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP ReSource reserVation Protocol

Rx Reception

SC Shelf Controller or Soft Connection

SD Signal Degrade

SF Signal Fail

SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable module

SLA Service Level Agreement

SLC Second Level Controller

SM Single Mode/Synchronous Mux

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SPE Synchronous Payload Envelope

SPI Synchronous Physical Interface

SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

SPI System Packet Interface

SSF Server Signal Fail

SRLG Shared Risk Link Groups

SSF Server Signal Fail

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SVLAN Stacked VLAN

SW Software

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol

TD Layout drawing

TDM Time Division Multiplexing

TE Traffic Engineering


............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TLS Transparent LAN Service

TL1 Transport Language 1

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TN Telecommunications Network

TNA Transport Network Address

TP Termination Point

TPD Transponder

TPD Tail Packets Discarding

TSS Transport Service Switch

TU Tributary Unit

TU12/TU3 Tributary unit level 12, 3

TX Transmission

UILA Upgradeable In-Line Amplifier

UNI User to Network Interface

URU Underlying Resource Unavailable

VID Virtual LAN Identifier

VLAN Virtual LAN

VPN Virtual Private Network

VT Virtual Tributary

WAN Wide Access Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WFQ Weighed Fair Queuing

XC Cross-Connection

XFP 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable module

ZIC Zero Installation Craft Terminal
